null  null
SCLX81_71.book Page 1 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Operating Instructions
audio/video multi-channel receiver
SCLX81_71.book Page 2 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
IMPORTANT
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
"dangerous voltage" within the product's
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel.
IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the
fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark
or the BSI mark
on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug
must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer.
If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of
safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.
If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
Blue : Neutral Brown : Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in
your plug, proceed as follows ;
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter L or coloured RED.
How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.
D3-4-2-1-2-2_B_En
WARNING
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following
section carefully.
The voltage of the available power supply differs
according to country or region. Be sure that the
power supply voltage of the area where this unit
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V
or 120 V) written on the rear panel.
D3-4-2-1-4_A_En
WARNING
To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked
flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the
equipment.
D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En
WARNING
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire
or shock hazard, do not place any container filled
with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or
flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain
or moisture.
D3-4-2-1-3_B_En
This product complies with the Low Voltage Directive
2006/95/EC and EMC Directive 2004/108/EC.
D3-4-2-1-9a_A_En
SCLX81_71.book Page 3 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Information for users on collection and disposal of old equipment and used batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean
that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with
general household waste.
Symbol for
equipment
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries,
please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national
legislation.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable
resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the
environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
Symbol examples
for batteries
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries,
please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale
where you purchased the items.
These symbols are only valid in the European Union.
For countries outside the European Union:
If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and
ask for the correct method of disposal.
Pb
K058_B_En
VENTILATION CAUTION
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 60 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and
30 cm at each side).
WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the
product, and to protect it from overheating. To
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En
SELEINPU
T
CTOR
 STAN
DBY/
ON
This product is for general household purposes. Any
failure due to use for other than household purposes
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which
requires repair will be charged for even during the
warranty period.
K041_En
CAUTION
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,
make sure the unit has been installed so that the
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,
the power cord should also be unplugged from the
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time
(for example, when on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En
PHAS
CON E
TROL
ADVA
MCANCED
CC
DIGIT
AL
SCALVIDE
ER O
HDM
I
MAS
VOLUTER
ME
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
strong artificial light)
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of
this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.
The equipment should be disconnected by removing
the mains plug from the wall socket when left
unused for a long period of time (for example, when
on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En
SCLX81_71.book Page 4 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate
your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.
Contents
01 Before you start
05 Listening to your system
Checking what’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Installing the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Loading the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Auto playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Home THX modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listening in stereo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Front Stage Surround Advance. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Stream Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choosing the input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using surround back channel processing . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the genre synchronizing function . . . . . . . . . . . .
02 Simple Home Theater Guide
Introduction to home theater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Listening to Surround Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Automatically setting up for surround sound
(MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup . . . . . 10
Playing a source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Better sound using Phase Control
and Full Band Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Using Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Using Full Band Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
03 Connecting your equipment
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
When making cable connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
About the video converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting your Blu-ray disc player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Connecting your TV and DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver
or other set-top box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR
and other video sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Using the component video jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Connecting digital audio sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
About the WMA9 Pro decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting analog audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Connecting a component to the front panel inputs . . . . 24
Installing your speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Connecting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Placing the speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Connecting antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Plugging in the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
04 Controls and displays
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Operating range of remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4
En
35
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
38
39
39
40
06 Using the tuner
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improving FM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the noise cut mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Neural THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning directly to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving station presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
An introduction to RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Searching for RDS programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using EON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
41
41
41
41
41
42
42
42
43
43
07 The Advanced MCACC menu
Making receiver settings from the Advanced
MCACC menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic MCACC (Expert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual MCACC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fine Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fine Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking MCACC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
45
47
48
48
49
49
50
52
54
08 The System Setup menu
Making receiver settings from the System
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surround back speaker setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speaker Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X-Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THX Audio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
56
57
57
58
59
59
59
SCLX81_71.book Page 5 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
09 Other connections
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs. . . . . . . . . 61
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . . . 61
Speaker B setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Switching the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Bi-amping your speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Bi-wiring your speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Connecting additional amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
MULTI-ZONE listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Making MULTI-ZONE connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Connecting an IR receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Switching components on and off
using the 12 volt trigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat screen TV . . . . . 68
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer flat
screen TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output . . . . . . 70
Advanced MCACC output using your PC . . . . . . . . . . 70
10 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY
inputs
Enjoying the Home Media Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Features of Home Media Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Steps to enjoy the Home Media Gallery. . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Playing back audio files on the network
and listening to Internet radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Playing back audio or photo files stored
on a USB memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod. . . . . . . . . 72
Connecting to the network through LAN interface. . . . 72
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
About network playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Windows Media Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Windows Media DRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
DLNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Content playable over a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
About playback behavior over a network . . . . . . . . . . 74
Authorizing this receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Playback with Home Media Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Playing back audio files stored on components
on the network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod. . . . . . . . . 76
Playing back audio files stored on a USB
memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Finding what you want to play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Basic playback controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Playing back photo files stored in components
on the network or USB memory device. . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Listening to Internet radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Listening to Neural Music Direct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Playing back your favorite songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
About playable file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Advanced operations for Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Saving Internet radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Retrieving saved Internet radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Setting up the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the network settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
85
85
85
11 HDMI Control
Making the HDMI Control connections . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the HDMI options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the HDMI Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before using synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronized amp mode operations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Canceling synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About PQLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
88
88
88
89
89
89
89
89
12 Other Settings
The Input Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input function default and possible settings . . . . . . .
Changing the OSD display language
(OSD Language) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Other Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi Channel Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZONE Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat screen TVs. . . . . . . . . . . .
Flicker Reduction Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
90
91
91
92
92
93
93
93
13 Using other functions
Setting the Audio options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Video options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making an audio or a video recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimming the display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching the HDMI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking your system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
96
96
97
97
97
98
98
98
99
14 Controlling the rest of your system
Setting the remote to control
other components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting preset codes directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming signals from other
remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erasing one of the remote control
button settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the remote control presets . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Confirming preset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Renaming input source names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi Operation and System Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming a multi-operation
or a shutdown sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using multi operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using System off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls for TVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls for other components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating other Pioneer components
with this unit’s sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
100
101
101
102
102
102
102
103
103
104
104
104
105
106
5
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 6 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
15 Additional information
Speaker Setting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Positional relationship between speakers
and monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
No sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output . . . . . 114
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Important information regarding the
HDMI connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
HOME MEDIA GALLERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
About status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Meaning of messages displayed when the
HDMI control function is set to ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Dolby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional. . . . . . . . . . . . 121
About THX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
About Neural – THX Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
About FLAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
FLAC Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Listening modes with different input
signal formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Stream direct with different input
signal formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Cleaning the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Our philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 7 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Before you start
01
Chapter 1:
Before you start
Checking what’s in the box
Loading the batteries
Please check that you’ve received the following supplied
accessories:
• Setup microphone (cable: 5 m)
• Remote control unit
• AA/IEC R6P dry cell batteries x2
• AM loop antenna
• FM wire antenna
• Power cord
• Warranty card
• These operating instructions
Caution
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as
leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:
• Never use new and old batteries together.
• Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries
properly according to the marks in the battery case.
Installing the receiver
• When installing this unit, make sure to put it on a
level and stable surface.
Don’t install it on the following places:
– on a color TV (the screen may distort)
– near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off
a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.
– in direct sunlight
– in damp or wet areas
– in extremely hot or cold areas
– in places where there is vibration or other movement
– in places that are very dusty
– in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)
• Batteries with the same shape may have different
voltages. Do not use different batteries together.
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply
with governmental regulations or environmental
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or
area.
• WARNING
Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the
life or performance of batteries.
• Do not touch this receiver’s bottom panel while the
power is turned on. The bottom panel gets hot when
the power is on, and touching it could cause burns.
7
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 8 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
02
Simple Home Theater Guide
Chapter 2:
Simple Home Theater Guide
Center (C)
Introduction to home theater
Home theater refers to the use of multiple audio tracks to
create a surround sound effect, making you feel like
you’re in the middle of the action or concert. The
surround sound you get from a home theater system
depends not only on your speaker setup, but also on the
source and the sound settings of the receiver.
This receiver will automatically decode multichannel
Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround sources according
to your speaker setup. In most cases, you won’t have to
make changes for realistic surround sound, but other
possibilities (like listening to a CD with multichannel
surround sound) are explained in Listening to your
system on page 35.
Listening to Surround Sound
This receiver was designed with the easiest possible
setup in mind, so with the following quick setup guide,
you should have your system hooked up for surround
sound in no time at all. In most cases, you can simply
leave the receiver in the default settings.
• Be sure to complete all connections before
connecting this unit to an AC power source.
Front
Right (R)
Subwoofer (SW)
Front
Left (L)
Surround
Right (SR)
Surround
Back Right (SBR)
Listening
position
Surround
Left (SL)
Surround Back Left (SBL)
3 Plug in the receiver and switch it on, followed by
your DVD player, your subwoofer and the TV.
Plug the power cable into the AC outlet and switch on the
receiver.1 Make sure you’ve set the video input on your TV
to this receiver. Check the manual that came with the TV
if you don’t know how to do this.
• Set the subwoofer volume to a comfortable level.
4 Use the on-screen automatic MCACC setup to set up
your system.
See Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC
& Full Band Phase Control) on page 9 for more on this.
1 Connect your TV and DVD player.
See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 19 to do
this. For surround sound, you’ll want to hook up using a
digital connection from the DVD player to the receiver.
5 Play a DVD, and adjust the volume to your liking.
Make sure that DVD is showing in the receiver’s display,
indicating that the DVD input is selected. If it isn’t, press
DVD on the remote control to set the receiver to the DVD
input.
2 Connect your speakers and place them for optimal
surround sound.
Connect your speakers as shown in Installing your
speaker system on page 25.
In addition to the basic playback explained in Playing a
source on page 10, there are several other sound options
you can select. See Listening to your system on page 35
for more on this.
Where you place the speakers will have a big effect on the
sound. Place your speakers as shown below for the best
surround sound effect. See also Placing the speakers on
page 26 for more on this.
See also Making receiver settings from the The Advanced
MCACC menu on page 44 or The System Setup menu on
page 56 for more setup options.
Note
1 After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 15-second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during
this process. The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped
blinking. When you set the HDMI Control mode to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the HDMI Control feature, see HDMI
Control on page 87.
8
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 9 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Simple Home Theater Guide
02
1
Automatically setting up for surround
sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase
Control)
The Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic
characteristics of your listening area, taking into account
ambient noise, speaker size and distance, and tests for
both channel delay and channel level. After you have set
up the microphone provided with your system, the
receiver uses the information from a series of test tones
to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your
particular room, and also to calibrate the frequencyphase characteristics of the speakers connected.
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC
jack on the front panel.
Place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your
normal listening position (use a tripod if possible). Make
sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and
the microphone.
• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel
door to access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack:
AUDIO
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
VIDEO
ENTER
(ST)
TUNER EDIT
AUTO SURR/ HOME
BAND STREAM DIRECT THX
STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO/
SURROUND SURROUND
A.L.C.
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
iPod DIRECT
USB
(TUNE)
HOME MENU
CONTROL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
VIDEO3 INPUT
(ST)
RETURN
DIGITAL IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
MCACC
SETUP MIC
PHONES
Make sure you do this before moving on to Playing a
source on page 10.
Important
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not
moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.
• Before using the Auto MCACC Setup, the
headphones should be disconnected and the HOME
MEDIA GALLERY function should not be selected as
an input source.
The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the
microphone is connected.1
1a.Full Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Surr Back System :
Normal
Save SYMMETRY to : M1.MEMORY 1
START
Exit
Return
Caution
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are
output at high volume.
RECEIVER MAIN
ZONE2
CH
DVD
BD
DVR1
VIDEO1
VIDEO2
VIDEO3
TV
CD-R
PHONO
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
TV
SOURCE
3
MULTI
OPERATION
SOURCE
VOL
RCV
VOL
DVR2
TV CONTROL
INPUT
MUTE
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
TUNE +
MUTE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TOOLS
3 Make sure ‘Normal’ is selected,2 select an MCACC
preset3, then select START.4
Check that the remote control’s operation selector switch
is set to RCV.
4 Follow the instructions on-screen.
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re
using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to
a comfortable volume level.
INPUT SELECT
HDMI
TUNER
TOP MENU
BAND
ST
MENU
T.EDIT
ENTER
PTY
SEARCH
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
ST +
RETURN
TUNE
5 Wait for the test tones to finish, then confirm the
speaker configuration in the OSD.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while
it’s doing this.5
Note
1 • You can’t use the HOME MENU in either the main or sub zone when the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input source is selected. When you set
ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or ZONE 2&3 to ON (page 66), you can’t use the HOME MENU.
• If you leave the OSD (on screen display) for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.
2 • If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back
speaker setting on page 57 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 4.
• If you have THX-certified speakers, select Return, then select Auto MCACC for the THX Speaker setting. See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on
page 45 for more on this.
3 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now
(you can rename it later in Data Management on page 54).
4 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select Return, then select Auto MCACC to save other correction curves
(such as ALL CH ADJUST and FRONT ALIGN). See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 45 for more on this.
5 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.
9
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 10 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
02
Simple Home Theater Guide
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in
step 6.
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient
noise! or Check microphone) select RETRY after
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when
using the Auto MCACC Setup below) and verifying the
mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a
problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and
continue.
1a.Full Auto MCACC
1a.Full Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
Now Analyzing...
2/10
L
C
R
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW
10
OK
Environment Check
Ambient Noise
: OK
Microphone
:
Speaker YES/NO :
Exit
Cancel
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup
If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto
MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the
walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the
microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check
for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan,
etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch
them off if necessary. If there are any instructions
showing in the front panel display, please follow them.
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of
the microphone. If this seems to be happening,
switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.
RETRY
Exit
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is
also possible to adjust these settings manually using The
Advanced MCACC menu on page 44 or The System Setup
menu on page 56.2
Cancel
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the
actual speakers you have.
Playing a source
If you see an error message (ERR) (or the speaker
configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a
problem with the speaker connection. If selecting RETRY
doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker
connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you
can simply use / to select the speaker and / to
change the setting and continue.
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such
as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.
6 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the
optimum receiver settings for Channel Level, Speaker
Distance, Standing Wave, Acoustic Cal EQ and Full Band
Phase Control.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is
happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes.
7 The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! Press RETURN
to go back to the HOME MENU.1
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver
upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup.
SEARCH
RECEIVER MAIN
ZONE2
SOURCE
STATUS
DVD
BD
DVR1
DVR2
VIDEO1
VIDEO2
VIDEO3
TV
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
TUNER
TV
CH
SOURCE
VOL
THX
RCV
AUTO/
DIRECT
VOL
TUNE
PHASE CTRL
MPX
STEREO/
A.L.C.
CH LEVEL
EON
STANDARD ADV SURR
PGM
BD MENU
CD-R
PHONO
INPUT SELECT
HDMI
RETURN
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
3
MULTI
OPERATION
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
TV CONTROL
INPUT
MUTE
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
TUNE +
MUTE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TOOLS
SR+
SBch
DIMMER
AUDIO
MCACC
DISP
A.ATT
GENRE HDMI OUT
1 Switch on your system components and receiver.
Start by switching on the playback component (for
example a DVD player), your TV3 and subwoofer (if you
have one), then the receiver (press RECEIVER).
• Make sure the setup mic is disconnected.
2 Select the input source you want to play.
You can use the input source buttons on the remote
control, INPUT SELECT, or the front panel INPUT
SELECTOR dial.4
Note
1 You can also choose to view the settings from the MCACC Data Check screen. See Checking MCACC Data on page 52 for more on this.
2 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size
settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 56.
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking
delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend
adjusting the settings manually.
3 Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO 1 jacks on your TV, make
sure that the VIDEO 1 input is now selected).
4 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 38).
10
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 11 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Simple Home Theater Guide
3 Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then press
AUTO/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/STREAM DIRECT) to
select ‘AUTO SURROUND’ and start playback of the
source.1
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound
DVD disc, you should hear surround sound. If you are
playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the
front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.
• See also Listening to your system on page 35 for
information on different ways of listening to sources.
It is possible to check on the front panel display whether
or not multi-channel playback is being performed
properly.
When using a surround back speaker, 2D+PLIIx
MOVIE is displayed when playing Dolby Digital signals,
and DTS+Neo:6 is displayed when playing DTS 5.1channel signals.
When not using a surround back speaker, DOLBY
DIGITAL is displayed when playing Dolby Digital signals.
For other details, see Listening modes with different input
signal formats on page 125. If the display does not
correspond to the input signal and listening mode, check
the connections and settings.
4 Use the volume control to adjust the volume level.
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is
coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.
02
Using Phase Control
During multichannel playback, LFE (Low-Frequency
Effects) signals as well as low-frequency signals in each
channel are assigned to the subwoofer or other the
subwoofer and the most appropriate speaker. At least in
theory, however, this type of processing involves a group
delay that varies with frequency, resulting in phase
distortion where the low-frequency sound is delayed or
muffled by the conflict with other channels. With the
Phase Control mode switched on, this receiver can
reproduce powerful bass sound without deteriorating the
quality of the original sound (see illustration below).
Phase Control OFF
Front speaker
Sound
source
Sound muffled due
to a delay in time
Subwoofer
• Rhythms blurred and difficult to hear
• Bass sound with loss of depth
• Sound of musical instruments with no reality
Phase Control ON
Front speaker
Better sound using Phase Control and
Full Band Phase Control
This receiver is equipped with the two types of functions
that correct phase distortion and group delay: Phase
Control and Full Band Phase Control. Activating Full
Band Phase Control is strongly recommended because it
also involves the effects of Phase Control. For details on
each of these two features, refer to the following
explanations.
Listening
position
Sound
source
Listening
position
Subwoofer
Original sound
preserved with no
loss of clarity
• Rhythms with crystal-like clarity
• Bass sound with no loss of depth
• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality
Note
1 • You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby
Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.
• Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this case, the receiver must
be set to a multichannel listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 35 if you need to do this) if you want multichannel surround
sound.
11
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 12 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
02
Simple Home Theater Guide
Phase Control technology provides coherent sound
reproduction through the use of phase matching1 for an
optimal sound image at your listening position. The
default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase
Control switched on for all sound sources.
PTY
SEARCH
TV
SOURCE
STATUS
RCV
THX
CH
VOL
RETURN
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
VOL
AUTO/
DIRECT
TUNE
PHASE CTRL
MPX
STEREO/
A.L.C.
CH LEVEL
This receiver analyzes the frequency-phase
characteristics of the speakers by calibrating test signals
output from the speakers with the supplied microphone,
therefore flattening the analyzed frequency-phase
characteristics during audio signal playback2 – the same
correction is made for a pair of left and right speakers.
This correction minimizes group delay between the
ranges of a speaker and improves the frequency-phase
characteristics across all ranges.
EON
STANDARD ADV SURR
PGM
BD MENU
• Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then
press PHASE CTRL (PHASE CONTROL) to select PHASE
CONTROL.
The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.
Furthermore, the enhanced frequency-phase
characteristics between channels ensure better
surround sound integration for multichannel setting.3
Full Band Phase Control OFF
Using Full Band Phase Control
Tweeter
The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the
frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers
connected.
Midrange
Standard speakers designed exclusively for audio use
generally reproduce sound with the divided frequency
bands output from a speaker system consisting of
multiple speakers (in case of typical 3-way speakers, for
instance, the tweeter, the squawker (midrange), and the
woofer output sound in the high-, middle-, and lowfrequency ranges, respectively). Though these speakers
are designed to flatten the frequency-amplitude
characteristics across wide ranges, there are cases
where the group delay characteristics are not effectively
flattened. This phase distortion of the speakers
subsequently causes group delay (the delay of lowfrequency sound against high-frequency sound) during
audio signal playback.
Woofer
Group Delay Characteristics
ms
Hz
Sound in the middle- and low-frequency ranges is
delayed against the high-frequency sound due to group
delay.
Note
1 • Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough
together, resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough (as shown in the upper
section of the diagram above), then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.
• The PHASE CONTROL feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in.
• If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually feel when PHASE
CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also
recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer.
• Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher
value.
• If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.
• The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
– When the MULTI CH IN input is selected.
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 94.
2 To calibrate and analyze the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers, either follow the Full Auto MCACC procedure under Advanced
MCACC (see Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 9), or set Auto MCACC menu under
Auto MCACC under Advanced MCACC to FULL BAND PHASE CTRL. Select ALL when you perform the Auto MCACC with Auto MCACC
menu. Upon calibration of the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers, the FULL BAND PHASE CTRL feature is automatically
switched on. Note that FULLBAND PHASE cannot be selected unless the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers are calibrated.
3 The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics after correction can be displayed
graphically in the OSD (see Using Full Band Phase Control above). Also, when your PC is connected to this receiver, the original characteristics
of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the corrected characteristics of group delay can be displayed in 3-dimension on your PC (see
Advanced MCACC output using your PC on page 70).
12
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 13 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Simple Home Theater Guide
02
Full Band Phase Control ON
Tweeter
Midrange
Woofer
Group Delay Characteristics
ms
Hz
With the phase distortion corrected, the frequency-phase
characteristics are improved across all ranges.
• Sound with live dynamics
• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality
• Sound so accurately reproduced that you can even
hear the lip movement of the singer
• Speech heard with no loss of clarity
• Surround sound with excellent integration
PTY
SEARCH
TV
SOURCE
STATUS
RCV
THX
CH
VOL
RETURN
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
VOL
AUTO/
DIRECT
TUNE
PHASE CTRL
MPX
STEREO/
A.L.C.
CH LEVEL
EON
STANDARD ADV SURR
PGM
BD MENU
• Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then
press PHASE CTRL (PHASE CONTROL) to select
FULLBAND PHASE.1
Both the Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control
functions are switched on. The PHASE CONTROL
indicator on the front panel lights.
Note
1 The FULL BAND PHASE CTRL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
– When headphones are plugged in.
– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 94.
13
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 14 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Connecting your equipment
03
Chapter 3:
Connecting your equipment
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This page explains the
kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.
Important
• Illustration shows the SC-LX81, however connections for the SC-LX71 are the same except where noted.
Rear panel
1 LAN
(10/100)
3
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD)
2
HDMI
BD
IN
IN 2 (CD)
5
12 V
TRIGGER
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
6
1
9
IN 1
IN 2
(DVD)
2
10
11
PR
PB
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
R
13
PR
L
15
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
PB
PR
19
AC IN
ANTENNA
Y
(VIDEO2)
PB
Y
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
ZONE 2
OUT
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
FM UNBAL 75
COMPONENT VIDEO
AM LOOP
S-VIDEO
14
16
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
L
PRE OUT
IN 3 (DVR2)
IR
ZONE 3
OUT
IN
VIDEO
R
SUBWOOFER
1
IN
1
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
IN
2
IN 2
(DVR1)
IN
2
12
SIGNAL
GND
PHONO
IN
CD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
DVD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO1
IN
VIDEO2
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
IN
OUT
IN
17
MULTI CH IN
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
L
L
R
R
OUT
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
7
IN
CONTROL
IN
3
IN 4
(CD-R)
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
1
4
ZONE3/
SOURCE
OUT
OUT
8
SUBWOOFER
18
SPEAKERS
SELECTABLE
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
R SURROUND BACK/
B
L (Single)
R
SURROUND
L
A R
FRONT
L
CENTER
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
(HDMI
CTRL)
OUT
2
SOURCE
OUT
RS-232C
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
Caution
• Before making or changing the connections, switch
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.
1
LAN (10/100) terminal
 See Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs on
page 71.
2 HDMI connectors (x6 (SC-LX81), x5 (SC-LX71))
Multiple inputs and one (SC-LX71) or two (SC-LX81)
outputs for high-quality audio/video connection to
compatible HDMI devices.
 See Connecting using HDMI on page 16.
 SC-LX81 only: See Switching the HDMI output on
page 98.
3 Optical and coaxial digital audio inputs
(x7 (SC-LX81), x6 (SC-LX71))
Use for digital audio sources, including DVD players/
recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players, etc.
 See also The Input Setup menu on page 90 to assign
the inputs.
14
En
4 Optical digital audio outputs (x2)
Use for recording to a CD or MiniDisc recorder.
 See Connecting digital audio sources on page 23.
ZONE3/SOURCE OUT jack is also used for MULTI-ZONE
connections.
 See MULTI-ZONE listening on page 64.
5 12 V trigger jacks (total 50 mA max.) (x2)
Use to switch components in your system on and off
according to the input function of the receiver.
 See Switching components on and off using the 12
volt trigger on page 68.
6 Remote inputs/output
Use for connection to an external remote control sensor
for use in a MULTI-ZONE setup, for example.
 See Connecting an IR receiver on page 67.
7 Control input/output
Use to connect other Pioneer components so that you
can control all your equipment from a single IR remote
sensor.
 See Operating other Pioneer components with this
unit’s sensor on page 106.
SCLX81_71.book Page 15 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Connecting your equipment
8 RS-232C connector
Use for connection to a PC for graphical output when
using Advanced MCACC or Full Band Phase Control.
 See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on
page 70.
03
When making cable connections
• To avoid hum, do not lay connected cables over the
top of the receiver.
9 Component video inputs (x3)
Use the inputs to connect any video source that has
component video output, such as a DVD player.
 See Using the component video jacks on page 22.
10 SC-LX81 only: ZONE 2 component video output
Use to connect monitors or TVs in a separate room.
 See MULTI-ZONE listening on page 64.
11 MULTI-ZONE audio/video outputs
Use to connect a second or third amplifier and monitors
or TVs in a separate room.
 See MULTI-ZONE listening on page 64.
12 Stereo analog audio source inputs/(outputs) (x4)
Use for connection to audio sources such as CD players,
tape decks, turntables, etc.
 See Connecting analog audio sources on page 24.
• When connecting optical cables, be careful when
inserting the plug not to damage the shutter
protecting the optical socket.
• When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable
may be damaged if bent around sharp corners.
13 Composite, S-Video and Component monitor
outputs
Use to connect monitors and TVs.
 See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 19.
 See Using the component video jacks on page 22.
14 Audio/video source inputs/(outputs) (x8)
Use for connection to audio/visual sources, such as DVD
players/recorders, VCRs, etc. Each set of inputs has jacks
for composite video, S-Video and stereo analog audio.
 See Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other
video sources on page 21.
15 AM and FM antenna terminals
Use to connect indoor or outdoor antennas for radio
broadcasts.
 See Connecting antennas on page 27.
16 Multichannel pre-amplifier outputs
Use to connect separate amplifiers for front, center,
surround, surround back and subwoofer channels.
 See Connecting additional amplifiers on page 63 (see
also Installing your speaker system on page 25 for
powered subwoofer connection).
17 Multichannel analog audio inputs
7.1 channel inputs for connection to a DVD player with
multichannel analog outputs.
 See Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on
page 61.
18 Speaker terminals
Use for connection to the main front, center, surround
and surround back speakers.
 See Installing your speaker system on page 25.
19 AC power inlet
Connect the supplied power cord here.
15
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 16 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Connecting your equipment
03
About the video converter
The video converter ensures that all video sources are
output through all of the MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks.
The only exception is HDMI: since this resolution cannot
be downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to
the receiver’s HDMI video outputs when connecting this
video source.1
If several video components are assigned to the same
input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 90),
the converter gives priority to HDMI, component, SVideo, then composite (in that order).
High picture quality
Terminal for connection
with source device
Terminal for connection
with TV monitor
HDMI IN
PR
PB
HDMI OUT
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO IN
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends
switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the
Video options on page 96) OFF.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and
other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology
must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended
for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Connecting using HDMI
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped
component, you can connect it to this receiver using a
commercially available HDMI cable.2
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the
connected component is compatible with, including
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see below for
limitations), Video CD/Super VCD, CD and MP3. See
About the video converter above for more on HDMI
compatibility.
SC-LX81 only: When connecting to an HDMI/DVIcompatible monitor or a flat screen TV using the HDMI
OUT2 terminal, switch the HDMI output setting to HDMI
OUT2 or HDMI OUT ALL. See Switching the HDMI
output on page 98.
Video signals can be output
Note
1 If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat screen TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that
some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion
(in Setting the Video options on page 96) OFF.
2 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content
Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVIHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection,
however, does not support audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.
• If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display. Some
components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video
this is not a malfunction.
• Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.
• This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however,
make sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.
16
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 17 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Connecting your equipment
03
SC-LX81
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD)
HDMI
BD
IN
IN 1
1
12 V
TRIGGER
LAN (10/100)
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
IN 2
(DVD)
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
AC IN
PB
PR
ANTENNA
Y
(VIDEO2)
2
PR
PB
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
R
PR
PB
L
IN 2 (CD)
VIDEO
Y
MONITOR
OUT
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
FM UNBAL 75
COMPONENT VIDEO
AM LOOP
S-VIDEO
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
L
ZONE 2
OUT
PRE OUT
IN 3 (DVR2)
IR
ZONE 3
OUT
IN
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
IN 2
(DVR1)
IN
2
IN
1
PHONO
IN
SIGNAL
GND
IN
2
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
R
DVD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO1
IN
VIDEO2
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
IN
OUT
MULTI CH IN
IN
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
L
L
R
R
IN
SUBWOOFER
CONTROL
IN
3
IN 4
(CD-R)
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
R SURROUND BACK/
B
L (Single)
R
SURROUND
L
A
R
FRONT
L
CENTER
SELECTABLE
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
ZONE3/
SOURCE
OUT
SOURCE
OUT
SPEAKERS
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
(HDMI
CTRL)
OUT
2
CD
IN
OUT
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
OUT
1
VIDEO
SUBWOOFER
1
RS-232C
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
HDMI OUT
HDMI IN
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor or
flat screen TV
1 Use an HDMI cable to connect one of the HDMI IN
interconnects on this receiver to an HDMI output on
your HDMI component.
The HDMI indicator lights on the front panel when an
HDMI-equipped component is connected.
2 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT
interconnect on this receiver to an HDMI interconnect
on an HDMI-compatible monitor.
• Be careful to connect the terminal in the proper
direction.
HDMI/DVI-equipped component
About HDMI
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports
both video and audio on a single digital connection for
use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV
devices. HDMI was developed to provide the
technologies of High Bandwidth Digital Content
Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface
(DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital
content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant
displays.
3 Use INPUT SELECT to select the HDMI input you’ve
connected to (for example, HDMI 1).
You can also perform the same operation by using the
INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing
HDMI on the remote control repeatedly.
HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced,
or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel
surround-sound audio. HDMI features include
uncompressed digital video, one connector (instead of
several cables and connectors), and communication
between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.
• Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options
on page 94 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI
audio output from your TV or flat screen TV (no sound
will be heard from this receiver).
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
• If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat
screen TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on
your component or display. Note that some
components (such as video game units) have
resolutions that may not be converted. In this case,
use an analog video connection.
• You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s
digital out jacks.
17
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 18 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
03
Connecting your equipment
Connecting your Blu-ray disc player
SC-LX81
12 V
TRIGGER
LAN (10/100)
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD)
HDMI
BD
IN
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
IN 1
1
IN 2
(DVD)
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
AC IN
PB
PR
Y
ANTENNA
(VIDEO2)
2
PR
PB
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
R
PR
PB
L
IN 2 (CD)
VIDEO
Y
MONITOR
OUT
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
FM UNBAL 75
COMPONENT VIDEO
AM LOOP
S-VIDEO
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
L
ZONE 2
OUT
PRE OUT
IN 3 (DVR2)
IR
ZONE 3
OUT
IN
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
IN 2
(DVR1)
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
PHONO
IN
SIGNAL
GND
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
R
DVD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO1
IN
3
IN 4
(CD-R)
OUT
DVR2
IN
OUT
IN
MULTI CH IN
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
L
L
R
SUBWOOFER
R SURROUND BACK/
B
L (Single)
SELECTABLE
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
ZONE3/
SOURCE
OUT
SOURCE
OUT
SPEAKERS
OUT
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
RS-232C
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
HDMI OUT
Blu-ray disc player
The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together
with a Blu-ray disc player, with HDMI connections. If your
Blu-ray disc player offers multi-channel analog audio
outputs, see Connecting the multichannel analog inputs
on page 61.
• Connect an HDMI output on your Blu-ray disc player
to the BD HDMI input.
Connect using an HDMI cable.
En
DVR1
IN
ASSIGNABLE
(HDMI
CTRL)
18
VIDEO2
IN
R
CONTROL
IN
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
OUT
2
CD
IN
OUT
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
OUT
1
VIDEO
SUBWOOFER
1
R
SURROUND
L
A R
FRONT
L
CENTER
SCLX81_71.book Page 19 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Connecting your equipment
03
Connecting your TV and DVD player
SC-LX81
12 V
TRIGGER
LAN (10/100)
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD)
HDMI
BD
IN
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
IN 1
1
IN 2
(DVD)
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
AC IN
PB
PR
Y
ANTENNA
(VIDEO2)
2
PR
PB
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
R
PR
PB
L
IN 2 (CD)
VIDEO
Y
MONITOR
OUT
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
FM UNBAL 75
COMPONENT VIDEO
AM LOOP
S-VIDEO
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
L
ZONE 2
OUT
PRE OUT
IN 3 (DVR2)
IR
ZONE 3
OUT
IN
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
IN 2
(DVR1)
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
PHONO
IN
SIGNAL
GND
R
DVD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO1
IN
VIDEO2
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
IN
OUT
IN
MULTI CH IN
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
L
L
R
R
IN
SUBWOOFER
CONTROL
IN
3
IN 4
(CD-R)
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
SPEAKERS
OUT
ZONE3/
SOURCE
OUT
SOURCE
OUT
R SURROUND BACK/
B
L (Single)
R
SURROUND
L
A R
FRONT
L
CENTER
SELECTABLE
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
ASSIGNABLE
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
(HDMI
CTRL)
OUT
2
CD
IN
OUT
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
OUT
1
VIDEO
SUBWOOFER
1
RS-232C
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
OPTICAL COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
3
R
4
AUDIO L
ANALOG OUT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO OUT
2
S-VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
IN
1
DVD player
The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together
with a TV and DVD player, with S-Video or composite
video connections. Different TVs and DVD players may
offer alternative connections. See also Using the
component video jacks on page 22 if your TV and/or DVD
player has component video inputs/outputs. If your DVD
player offers multichannel analog audio outputs, see
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 61.
TV
• If your DVD player has multichannel analog outputs,
you can connect these instead. See also Connecting
the multichannel analog inputs on page 61.
1 Connect the MONITOR OUT video jack to a video
input on your TV.
Use a standard RCA/phono jack video cable to connect to
the composite video jack, or for higher quality video, use
an S-Video cable to connect to the S-Video jack.
2 Connect a composite or S-Video output on your
DVD player to the DVD VIDEO or DVD S-VIDEO input.
Connect using a standard video cable or an S-Video
cable.
3 Connect a coaxial-type1 digital audio output on
your DVD player to the COAXIAL IN 1 (DVD) input.
Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio.
4 Connect the stereo audio outputs on your DVD
player to the DVD AUDIO inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable.
Note
1 If your DVD player only has an optical digital output, you can connect it to one of the optical inputs on this receiver using an optical cable.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 90).
19
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 20 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
03
Connecting your equipment
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.
SC-LX81
12 V
TRIGGER
LAN (10/100)
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD)
HDMI
BD
IN
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
IN 1
1
IN 2
(DVD)
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
AC IN
PB
PR
Y
ANTENNA
(VIDEO2)
2
PR
PB
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
R
PR
PB
L
IN 2 (CD)
VIDEO
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
Y
MONITOR
OUT
FM UNBAL 75
COMPONENT VIDEO
AM LOOP
S-VIDEO
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
L
ZONE 2
OUT
PRE OUT
IN 3 (DVR2)
IR
ZONE 3
OUT
IN
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
IN 2
(DVR1)
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
CD
IN
R
DVD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO1
IN
VIDEO2
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
IN
OUT
IN
MULTI CH IN
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
L
L
R
R
IN
SUBWOOFER
CONTROL
IN
3
IN 4
(CD-R)
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
R SURROUND BACK/
B
L (Single)
R
SURROUND
L
A R
FRONT
L
CENTER
SELECTABLE
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE3/
SOURCE
OUT
SOURCE
OUT
SPEAKERS
OUT
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
(HDMI
CTRL)
OUT
2
PHONO
IN
SIGNAL
GND
OUT
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
OUT
1
VIDEO
SUBWOOFER
1
RS-232C
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
DIGITAL OUT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
R AUDIO L
AV OUT
STB
1 Connect the audio/video outputs on the set-top
box to the TV/SAT AUDIO and VIDEO inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable and a
video or S-Video cable.
2 Connect an optical-type1 digital audio output from
your set-top box to the OPTICAL IN 1 (TV/SAT) input.2
Use an optical cable for the connection.
Note
1 If your set-top box only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio
cable. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see The Input Setup menu on
page 90).
2 If your satellite/cable receiver doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.
20
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 21 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Connecting your equipment
03
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other video sources
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video devices,
including DVD/HDD recorders and VCRs.
SC-LX81
12 V
TRIGGER
LAN (10/100)
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD)
HDMI
BD
IN
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
IN 1
1
IN 2
(DVD)
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
PR
AC IN
PB
ANTENNA
Y
(VIDEO2)
2
PR
PB
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
R
PR
PB
L
IN 2 (CD)
VIDEO
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
Y
MONITOR
OUT
FM UNBAL 75
COMPONENT VIDEO
AM LOOP
S-VIDEO
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
L
ZONE 2
OUT
PRE OUT
IN 3 (DVR2)
IR
ZONE 3
OUT
IN
VIDEO
R
SUBWOOFER
1
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
IN 2
(DVR1)
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
PHONO
IN
SIGNAL
GND
CD
IN
DVD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO1
IN
DVR1
VIDEO2
IN
OUT
DVR2
IN
OUT
MULTI CH IN
IN
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
L
L
R
R
OUT
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
IN
SUBWOOFER
CONTROL
IN
3
IN 4
(CD-R)
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
ASSIGNABLE
SOURCE
OUT
B
L (Single)
R
SURROUND
L
A
R
FRONT
L
CENTER
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
(HDMI
CTRL)
OUT
2
R SURROUND BACK/
SELECTABLE
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
ZONE3/
SOURCE
OUT
OUT
1
SPEAKERS
OUT
RS-232C
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AV IN
R
AUDIO
L
R
3
AUDIO
L
VIDEO S-VIDEO
AV OUT
1
2
DVR, VCR, etc.
1 Connect the audio/video outputs of the video
player/recorder to the DVR 1 AUDIO and VIDEO inputs.
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio
connection and a video or S-Video cable for the video
connection.
• For a second recorder, use the DVR 2 IN inputs.
3 If the device can output digital audio, connect an
optical-type1 digital audio output from the recorder to
the OPTICAL IN 2 (DVR 1) input.
Use an optical cable for the connection.2
• SC-LX81 only: For a second recorder, use the
COAXIAL IN 3 (DVR 2) input.
2 If the device can record, connect the DVR 1 AUDIO
and VIDEO outputs to the recorder’s audio/video
inputs.
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio
connection and a video or S-Video cable for the video
connection.
• For a second recorder, use the DVR 2 OUT outputs.
Note
1 • In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback only).
• If your video component doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.
2 If your recorder only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio
cable. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The Input Setup menu
on page 90).
21
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 22 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
03
Connecting your equipment
Using the component video jacks
Component video should give superior picture quality when compared to composite or S-Video. You can also take
advantage of progressive scan video (if your source and TV are both compatible), which delivers a very stable, flickerfree picture. See the manuals that came with your TV and source component to check whether they are compatible
with progressive-scan video.
SC-LX81
12 V
TRIGGER
LAN (10/100)
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD)
HDMI
BD
IN
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
IN 1
1
IN 2
(DVD)
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
AC IN
PB
PR
Y
ANTENNA
(VIDEO2)
2
PR
PB
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
R
PR
PB
L
IN 2 (CD)
VIDEO
Y
MONITOR
OUT
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
FM UNBAL 75
COMPONENT VIDEO
AM LOOP
S-VIDEO
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
L
ZONE 2
OUT
PRE OUT
IN 3 (DVR2)
IR
ZONE 3
OUT
IN
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
IN 2
(DVR1)
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
SIGNAL
GND
CD
IN
R
DVD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO1
IN
VIDEO2
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
IN
OUT
IN
MULTI CH IN
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
L
L
R
R
IN
SUBWOOFER
CONTROL
IN
3
IN 4
(CD-R)
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
R SURROUND BACK/
B
L (Single)
R
SURROUND
L
A R
FRONT
L
CENTER
SELECTABLE
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE3/
SOURCE
OUT
SOURCE
OUT
SPEAKERS
OUT
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
(HDMI
CTRL)
OUT
2
PHONO
IN
OUT
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
OUT
1
VIDEO
SUBWOOFER
1
RS-232C
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
1
2
PR
PB
Y
PR
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
DVD player
1 Connect the component video outputs of your
source to a set of COMPONENT VIDEO inputs.
Connect using a three-way component video cable.
• Since they are assignable, it doesn’t matter which
component video inputs you use for which source.
After connecting everything, you’ll need to assign the
component video inputs—see The Input Setup menu
on page 90.
2 Connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to the
component video inputs on your TV or monitor.
Use a three-way component video cable.
22
En
PB
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
TV
Y
SCLX81_71.book Page 23 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Connecting your equipment
03
Connecting digital audio sources
This receiver has both digital inputs and outputs, allowing you to connect digital audio components for playback and
for making digital recordings.
Most digital components also have analog connections. See Connecting analog audio sources on page 24 if you want
to connect these too.
SC-LX81
12 V
TRIGGER
LAN (10/100)
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD)
HDMI
BD
IN
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
IN 1
1
IN 2
(DVD)
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
PR
AC IN
PB
ANTENNA
Y
(VIDEO2)
2
PR
PB
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
R
PR
PB
L
IN 2 (CD)
VIDEO
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
Y
MONITOR
OUT
FM UNBAL 75
COMPONENT VIDEO
AM LOOP
S-VIDEO
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
L
ZONE 2
OUT
PRE OUT
IN 3 (DVR2)
IR
ZONE 3
OUT
IN
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
IN 2
(DVR1)
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
SIGNAL
GND
CD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
R
DVD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO1
IN
VIDEO2
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
IN
OUT
MULTI CH IN
IN
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
L
L
R
R
IN
SUBWOOFER
CONTROL
IN
3
IN 4
(CD-R)
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
R SURROUND BACK/
B
L (Single)
R
SURROUND
L
A
R
FRONT
L
CENTER
SELECTABLE
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
ZONE3/
SOURCE
OUT
SOURCE
OUT
SPEAKERS
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
(HDMI
CTRL)
OUT
2
PHONO
IN
OUT
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
OUT
1
VIDEO
SUBWOOFER
1
RS-232C
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
2
1
CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.
1 Connect an optical-type1 digital audio output on
your digital component to the OPTICAL IN 4 (CD-R)
input.
Use an optical cable for the connection.
2 For recording equipment, connect one of the
optical-type DIGITAL outputs to a digital input on the
recorder.
Use an optical cable to connect to the SOURCE OUT or
ZONE3/SOURCE OUT.2
About the WMA9 Pro decoder
This unit has an on-board Windows Media™ Audio 9
Professional3 (WMA9 Pro) decoder, so it is possible to
playback WMA9 Pro-encoded audio using a coaxial or
optical digital connection when connected to a WMA9
Pro-compatible player. However, the connected PC, DVD
player, set-top box, etc. must be able to output WMA9 Pro
format audio signals through a coaxial or optical digital
output.
Note
1 • If your digital component only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial
cable. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also The Input Setup
menu on page 90).
• The digital outputs from other components can be connected to any spare digital audio inputs on this receiver. You can assign them when
setting up the receiver (see also The Input Setup menu on page 90).
2 • When you want to record the source connected to ZONE3/SOURCE OUT, set ZONE3 to OFF. If you want to listen to the sound output from
ZONE3/SOURCE OUT in the sub zone without recording it, set ZONE3 to ON. See Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 66.
• In order to record some digital sources, you must make analog connections as explained in Connecting analog audio sources on page 24.
3 • Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz sources will be
downsampled to 48 kHz.
23
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 24 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
03
Connecting your equipment
Connecting analog audio sources
This receiver features five stereo audio-only inputs. One of these inputs have corresponding outputs for use with audio
recorders.
One of the audio inputs (PHONO) is a dedicated turntable input which should not be used for any other type of
component. This input also has a grounding terminal that most turntables require.
SC-LX81
12 V
TRIGGER
LAN (10/100)
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD)
HDMI
BD
IN
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
IN 1
1
IN 2
(DVD)
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
PR
AC IN
PB
ANTENNA
Y
(VIDEO2)
2
PR
PB
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
R
PR
PB
L
IN 2 (CD)
VIDEO
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
Y
MONITOR
OUT
FM UNBAL 75
COMPONENT VIDEO
AM LOOP
S-VIDEO
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
L
ZONE 2
OUT
PRE OUT
IN 3 (DVR2)
IR
ZONE 3
OUT
IN
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
IN 2
(DVR1)
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
SIGNAL
GND
CD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
R
DVD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO1
IN
VIDEO2
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
IN
OUT
IN
MULTI CH IN
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
L
L
R
R
IN
SUBWOOFER
CONTROL
IN
3
IN 4
(CD-R)
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
R SURROUND BACK/
B
L (Single)
R
SURROUND
A R
L
FRONT
L
CENTER
SELECTABLE
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
ZONE3/
SOURCE
OUT
SOURCE
OUT
SPEAKERS
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
(HDMI
CTRL)
OUT
2
PHONO
IN
OUT
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
OUT
1
VIDEO
SUBWOOFER
1
RS-232C
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
2
1
OUT
PLAY
IN
REC
R
L
AUDIO IN/OUT
Turntable
1 Connect the analog audio outputs of the source
component to one of the AUDIO inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable.
• If you’re connecting a tape deck, MD recorder, etc.,
connect the analog audio outputs (OUT) to the
analog audio inputs on the recorder.
Tape deck, etc.
2 Turntables only: Connect the stereo audio outputs to
the PHONO inputs.
• If your turntable has a grounding wire, secure it to the
ground terminal on this receiver.
• If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a
built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD inputs
instead.
Connecting a component to the front panel inputs
The front panel inputs comprise a composite video jack
(VIDEO), an S-Video jack (S-VIDEO), stereo analog audio
inputs (AUDIO L/R) and an optical digital audio input
(DIGITAL IN). You can use these connections for any kind
of audio/video component, but they are especially
convenient for portable equipment such as camcorders,
video games and portable audio/video equipment.
• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel
door to access the front video connections.
AUDIO
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
VIDEO
TUNER EDIT
AUTO SURR/ HOME
BAND STREAM DIRECT THX
STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO/
SURROUND SURROUND
A.L.C.
(ST)
ENTER
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
(ST)
iPod DIRECT
USB
(TUNE)
HOME MENU
CONTROL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
VIDEO3 INPUT
RETURN
DIGITAL IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
MCACC
SETUP MIC
PHONES
TV game, video camera,
etc.
DIGITAL OUT
VIDEO OUTPUT
• Select these inputs using INPUT SELECT (remote) or
the INPUT SELECTOR dial (front panel) to select
VIDEO 3.
24
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 25 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Connecting your equipment
03
Installing your speaker system
To take full advantage of the receiver’s surround sound capabilities connect front, center, surround and surround back
speakers, as well as a subwoofer.1 Although this is ideal, other configurations with fewer speakers—no subwoofer or
no center speaker, or even no surround speakers—will work. At the very least, front left and right speakers only are
necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just
one surround back speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal).
Front
right
Front
left
Center
Subwoofer
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
12 V
TRIGGER
LAN (10/100)
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD)
HDMI
BD
IN
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
IN 1
1
IN 2
(DVD)
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
AC IN
PB
PR
Y
ANTENNA
(VIDEO2)
2
PR
PB
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
R
PR
PB
L
IN 2 (CD)
VIDEO
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
Y
MONITOR
OUT
FM UNBAL 75
COMPONENT VIDEO
AM LOOP
S-VIDEO
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
L
ZONE 2
OUT
PRE OUT
IN 3 (DVR2)
IR
ZONE 3
OUT
IN
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
IN 2
(DVR1)
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
SIGNAL
GND
CD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
R
DVD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO1
IN
VIDEO2
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
IN
OUT
MULTI CH IN
IN
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
L
L
R
R
IN
SUBWOOFER
CONTROL
IN
3
IN 4
(CD-R)
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
R SURROUND BACK/
B
L (Single)
R
SURROUND
L
A
R
FRONT
L
CENTER
SELECTABLE
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
ZONE3/
SOURCE
OUT
SOURCE
OUT
SPEAKERS
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
(HDMI
CTRL)
OUT
2
PHONO
IN
OUT
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
OUT
1
VIDEO
SUBWOOFER
1
RS-232C
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
SC-LX81
Surround
right
Surround
back right
Connecting the speakers
Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a
positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to
match these up with the terminals on the speakers
themselves.
Surround
back left
Surround
left
Caution
• These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE
voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when
connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables,
disconnect the power cord before touching any
uninsulated parts.
Note
1 • When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single) terminals.
• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel, not the surround back channel.
25
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 26 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
03
Connecting your equipment
• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted
together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal.
If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel
it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.
Bare wire connections
Make sure that the speaker cable you’re going to use is
properly prepared with about 10 mm of insulator stripped
from each wire, and the exposed wire strands twisted
together (fig. A).
To connect a terminal, unscrew the terminal a few turns
until there is enough space to insert the exposed wire (fig.
B). Once the wire is in position, tighten the terminal until
the wire is firmly clamped (fig. C).
fig. A
fig. B
fig. C
10 mm
• If you’re using a center speaker, place the front
speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a
narrower angle.
• Place the center speaker above or below the TV so
that the sound of the center channel is localized at
the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker
does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of
the front left and right speakers.
• It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening
position. The angle depends on the size of the room.
Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
• Surround and surround back speakers should be
positioned 60 cm to 90 cm higher than your ears and
titled slight downward. Make sure the speakers don’t
face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should
be more directly behind the listener than for home
theater playback.
• Try not to place the surround speakers farther away
from the listening position than the front and center
speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound
effect.
Important
• Please refer to the manual that came with your
speakers for details on how to connect the other end
of the speaker cables to your speakers.
• Other connections on page 61 provides greater detail
on alternate speaker setups, such as using speaker
system B (page 61), bi-amping (page 62) and biwiring (page 63).
• If you are using a THX certified subwoofer use the
THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer
has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your
subwoofer.
• To achieve the best possible surround sound, install
your speakers as shown below. Be sure all speakers
are installed securely to prevent accidents and
improve sound quality.
Front
left
Center
Front
right
Subwoofer
Surround
right
Surround
left
Placing the speakers
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect
on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines
should help you to get the best sound from your system.
• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the
other speakers should be at about ear-level when
you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the
floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very
high on a wall is not recommended.
• For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers
2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from the TV.
• When placing speakers near the TV, we recommend
using magnetically shielded speakers to prevent
possible interference, such as discoloration of the
picture when the TV is switched on. If you do not have
magnetically shielded speakers and notice
discoloration of the TV picture, move the speakers
farther away from the TV.
26
En
Listening position
Surround back left
Surround back right
Single surround back speaker
Caution
• Make sure that all speakers are securely installed.
This not only improves sound quality, but also
reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from
speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of
external shocks such as earthquakes.
SCLX81_71.book Page 27 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Connecting your equipment
03
The diagrams below show suggested surround and
surround back speaker orientation. The first diagram (fig.
A) shows orientation with one surround back speaker (or
none) connected. The second (fig. B) shows orientation
with two surround back speakers connected.
90° to 120°
LS
RS
LS
RS
Connecting antennas
The supplied antennas provide a simple way to listen to
AM and FM radio. If you find that reception quality is
poor, an outdoor antenna should give you better sound
quality—see Connecting external antennas on page 28.
RS
LS
0° to 60°
SB
SBL
SBL
SBR
SBR
SC-LX81
fig. A
fig. B
AC IN
ANTENNA
-3
FM UNBAL 75
EO
AM LOOP
S-VIDEO
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
L
PRE OUT
R
SUBWOOFER
O1
VIDEO2
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
IN
OUT
IN
MULTI CH IN
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
L
R
SUBWOOFER
AM loop antenna
1
Assemble the stand as shown in the illustration.1
fig. A
fig. B
fig. C
• Bend the stand in the direction indicated (fig. A).
• Clip the loop into the stand (fig. B).
• It’s possible to fix the AM antenna to a wall (fig. C).
Before fixing, make sure that the reception is
satisfactory.
2 Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna
wires.
3 Press the AM LOOP antenna terminal tabs to open
and insert one wire into each terminal.
4
Release the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires.
5 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and point in
the direction giving the best reception.
Avoid placing near computers, television sets or other
electrical appliances and do not let it come into contact
with metal objects.
Note
1 Do not use any antennas other than the supplied AM loop antenna.
27
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 28 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
03
Connecting your equipment
FM wire antenna
• Connect the FM wire antenna to the FM UNBAL
75 Ω in the same way as the AM antenna.
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a
wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.
Plugging in the receiver
Only plug in after you have connected all your
components to this receiver, including the speakers.
Caution
Connecting external antennas
• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull
out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the
power cord when your hands are wet, as this could
cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place
the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the
power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never
make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The
power cords should be routed so that they are not
likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can
cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the
power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged,
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent
service company for a replacement.
To improve FM reception connect an external FM
antenna to the FM UNBAL 75 Ω.
75 Ω coaxial cable
• Do not use any power cord other than the one
supplied with this unit.
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
• Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose
other than that described below.
AM LOOP
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m length of
vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without
disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna.
• The receiver should be disconnected by removing the
mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular
use, e.g., when on vacation.
For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally
outdoors.
Outdoor antenna
1 Plug the supplied power cord into the AC IN socket
on the back of the receiver.
Indoor antenna
(vinyl-coated wire)
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
AM LOOP
5 m to 6 m
28
En
• Make sure the blue  STANDBY/ON light has gone
out before unplugging.
2
Plug the other end into a power outlet.
SCLX81_71.book Page 29 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Controls and displays
04
Chapter 4:
Controls and displays
Front panel
Illustration shows the SC-LX81 front panel.
1
2
3 4
5
6
SC-LX81
INPUT
SELECTOR
MASTER
VOLUME
PHASE
CONTROL
ADVANCED
MCACC
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER
HDMI
 STANDBY/ON
8
9 10
AUDIO
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
VIDEO
ENTER
(ST)
11 12
TUNER EDIT
13
AUTO SURR/ HOME
BAND STREAM DIRECT THX
14
STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO/
SURROUND SURROUND
A.L.C.
16
RETURN
17
DIGITAL IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
MCACC
SETUP MIC
18 19
1  STANDBY/ON
Switches the receiver between on and standby. Power
indicator lights when the receiver is on.
2 INPUT SELECTOR dial
Use to select an input source.
3
SPEAKERS
iPod DIRECT
USB
(TUNE)
HOME MENU
ON/OFF
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
VIDEO3 INPUT
(ST)
7
CONTROL
15
PHASE CONTROL indicator – Lights to indicate
Phase Control or Full Band Phase Control is selected
(page 11).
ADVANCED MCACC indicator – Lights when one of
the Selecting MCACC presets on page 38 is selected.1
20
PHONES
21
DIGITAL VIDEO SCALER indicator – Lights when
Resolution is set to a setting other than PURE (for
example, when the video input signal is upscaled
(page 16)).
HDMI indicator – Blinks when connecting an HDMIequipped component; lights when the component is
connected (page 16).
4 Remote sensor
Receives the signals from the remote control (see
Operating range of remote control unit on page 30).
5 Character display
See Display on page 31.
Note
1 The MCACC indicator does not light when the MCACC preset memory currently being selected has not been corrected with Acoustic
Calibration EQ Professional or when EQ is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu (see Setting the Audio options on page 94).
29
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 30 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Controls and displays
04
6
MASTER VOLUME dial
7 Front panel controls
To access the front panel controls, push gently on the
lower third portion of the panel with your finger.
18 iPod DIRECT USB terminal
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio source
(page 72), or connect a USB audio device for playback
(page 73).
19 VIDEO 3 INPUT
See Connecting a component to the front panel inputs on
page 24.
20 MCACC SETUP MIC jack
Use to connect the supplied microphone.
INPUT
SELEC
TOR
 STAND
BY/ON
PHAS
CONT E
ROL
ADVA
NCED
MCAC
C
DIGITA
L VIDEO
SCAL
ER
HDMI
MAST
VOLU ER
ME
8 AUDIO PARAMETER
Use to access the Audio options (page 94).
9 VIDEO PARAMETER
Use to access the Video options (page 96).
10 /// (TUNE/ST) /ENTER
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your HOME
MENU. Use TUNE / to find radio frequencies and use
ST / to find preset stations (page 41).
11 TUNER EDIT
Use with ////ENTER to memorize and name
stations for recall (page 41).
21 PHONES jack
Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are
connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.
Operating range of remote control unit
The remote control may not work properly if:
• There are obstacles between the remote control and
the receiver’s remote sensor.
• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the
remote sensor.
• The receiver is located near a device that is emitting
infrared rays.
• The receiver is operated simultaneously with another
infrared remote control unit.
12 BAND
Switches between AM and FM radio bands (page 41).
13 Listening mode buttons
AUTO SURR/STREAM DIRECT – Press to select Auto
Surround (page 35) or Stream Direct (page 38)
listening.
HOME THX – Press to select a Home THX listening
mode (page 36).
STANDARD SURROUND – Press for Standard
decoding and to switch between the various 2 Pro
Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 35).
ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch between
the various surround modes (page 36).
STEREO/A.L.C. – Switches between stereo playback,
Auto level control stereo mode and Front Stage
Surround Advance modes (page 37).
14 MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE controls
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTIZONE listening on page 64) use these controls to control
the sub zone from the main zone (see Using the MULTIZONE controls on page 66).
15 SPEAKERS
Use to change the speaker system (page 62).
16 HOME MENU
Press to access the HOME MENU (pages 44, 52, 54 and
56).
17 RETURN
Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.
30
En
SELEINPU
CTO T
R
 STAN
DBY
/ON
30°
PHA
CON SE
TRO
L
ADV
ANC
MCA
ED
CC
DIGI
TAL
SCA VIDE
LER O
30°
7m
HDM
I
MAS
VOL TER
UME
SCLX81_71.book Page 31 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Controls and displays
04
Display
1
2
3
45
6
7
8
9 10
11 12
L
C
R 2DIGITAL 2HD FULL BAND PHASE CONTROL DNR TUNED RDS
DTS WMA9 Pro MULTI-ZONE DIALOG E ATT OVER STEREO EON
SL S SR AAC DSD PCM S.RTRV SOUND Hi-Bit/Sampling V.SB MONO
HDMI
SBL SB SBR
DIGITAL
VIDEO HMG
CD
DVD TV
TUNER
LFE
ANALOG
[2]
13
14
AUTO
PCM
CD-R
PHONO
BDP DVR
HDMI
[1]
dB
SR+
[3]
STREAM DIRECT
Neo : 6
2PRO LOGIC
THX ADV.SURROUND
STEREO STANDARD
SLEEP
SP AB
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
1 SIGNAL indicators
Light to indicate the currently selected input signal.
AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input
signal automatically (page 38).
10 TUNER indicators
TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.
2 Program format indicators
These change according to which channels are active in
digital sources.
MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using MPX.
L – Left front channel
C – Center channel
R – Right front channel
SL – Left surround channel
S – Surround channel (mono)
SR – Right surround channel
SBL – Left surround back channel
SB – Surround back channel (mono)
SBR – Right surround back channel
LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the ((( ))) indicators light when
an LFE signal is being input)
STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is
being received in auto stereo mode.
11 EON/RDS indicators
EON – Lights when the EON mode is set (flashes
during EON reception). The indicator lights when
the current station carries the EON service (page 43).
RDS – Lights when an RDS broadcast is received
(page 42).
12 SOUND
Lights when any of the Midnight, Loudness or tone
controls feature is selected (page 94).
13 Master volume level
Shows the overall volume level. –80dB indicates the
minimum level, and +12dB indicates the maximum level.
3 Digital format indicators
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format
is detected (DSDPCM lights during DSD (Digital
Stream Direct) to PCM conversion with SACDs).
14 SR+
Lights when the SR+ mode is switched on (page 69).
4 S.RTRV
Lights when the Sound Retriever is switched on (page 94).
15 STREAM DIRECT
Lights when Direct/Pure Direct is selected (page 38).
5 MULTI-ZONE
Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (page 64).
16 Speaker indicators
Lights to indicate the current speaker system, A and/or B
(page 62).
6 FULL BAND
Lights when the Full Band Phase Control is switched on
(page 12).
7 PHASE CONTROL
Lights when the Phase Control or Full Band Phase
Control is switched on (page 11).
8 Sound processing indicators
Light according to the active Audio parameter(s)
(page 94) and/or ANALOG ATT (page 97).
9 V.SB
Lights during Virtual surround back processing
(page 39).
17 Listening mode indicators
THX – Lights when one of the Home THX modes is
selected.
ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of the
Advanced Surround modes has been selected.
STEREO – Lights when stereo listening is switched
on (see Listening in stereo on page 37).
STANDARD – Lights when one of the Standard
Surround modes is switched on (see Standard
surround sound on page 35).
18 SLEEP
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 97).
31
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 32 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
04
Controls and displays
19 Matrix decoding format indicators
2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2 Pro
Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page 35).
Neo:6 – When one of the Neo:6 modes of the receiver
is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing (page 35).
20 Character display
Displays various system information.
Remote control
Illustration shows the SC-LX81 remote control.
1
RECEIVER
2
3
21 Input source indicators
Light to indicate the input source you have selected.
MAIN
SOURCE
ZONE2
13
3
MULTI
OPERATION
DVD
BD
DVR1
DVR2
VIDEO1
VIDEO2
VIDEO3
TV
CD-R
PHONO
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
4
INPUT SELECT
TUNER
HDMI
5
14
6
TV
SOURCE
CH
VOL
7
TV CONTROL
INPUT
MUTE
8
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
TUNE +
ENTER
PTY
SEARCH
11
AUTO/
DIRECT
MUTE
17
ST +
RETURN
TUNE
STATUS
THX
16
MENU
T.EDIT
ST
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
10
VOL
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TOOLS
TOP MENU
BAND
9
15
RCV
PHASE CTRL
MPX
STEREO/
A.L.C.
CH LEVEL
EON
STANDARD ADV SURR
PGM
BD MENU
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
SR+
SBch
DIMMER
AUDIO
MCACC
DISP
12
A.ATT
GENRE HDMI OUT
D.ACCESS
CLASS
CH
ENTER
CLR
The remote has been conveniently color-coded according
to component control using the following system:
• White – Receiver control, TV Control
• Blue – Other controls
1 MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch
Switch to perform operations in the main zone, zone 2
and zone 3 (page 64).
2 RECEIVER
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.
3 MULTI OPERATION
Use this button to perform multi operations (page 103).
32
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 33 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Controls and displays
4 Input source buttons
Press to select control of other components (see
Controlling the rest of your system on page 100).
5 INPUT SELECT
Use to select the input source.
6 Character display (LCD)
This display shows information when transmitting
control signals.
The following commands are shown when you’re setting
the remote to control other components (see Controlling
the rest of your system on page 100):
SETUP – Indicates the setup mode, from which you
choose the options below.
PRESET – See Selecting preset codes directly on
page 100.
LEARNING – See Programming signals from other
remote controls on page 101.
MULTI OP – See Multi Operation and System Off on
page 103.
04
VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the Video
options (page 96).
HOME MENU – Use to access the HOME MENU
(pages 44, 52, 54 and 56).
RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current
menu screen (also use to return to the previous menu
with DVDs or to select closed captioning with DTV).
9 /// (TUNE +/–/ST +/–) /ENTER
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround
sound system (see page 44) and the Audio or Video
options (page 94 or 96). Also used to control DVD menus/
options and for deck 1 of a double cassette deck player.
Use TUNE +/– (/) to find radio frequencies and use
ST +/– (/) to find preset stations (page 41).
10 Component control buttons
The main buttons (, , etc.) are used to control a
component after you have selected it using the input
source buttons.
SYS OFF – See Multi Operation and System Off on
page 103.
The controls above these buttons can be accessed after
you have selected the corresponding input source button
(for example DVD, DVR 1 or TV). These buttons also
function as described below.
DIRECT F – See Direct function on page 102.
Press TUNER first to access:
RENAME – See Renaming input source names on
page 102.
ERASE – See Erasing one of the remote control button
settings on page 101.
RESET – See Resetting the remote control presets on
page 102.
READ ID – See Confirming preset codes on page 102.
7 TV CONTROL buttons
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to
TV operation selector switch. Thus if you only have one TV
to hook up to this system assign it to the TV operation
selector switch (see page 100 for more on this).
 – Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.
VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your TV.
INPUT – Use to select the TV input signal.
CH +/– – Use to select channels.
MUTE – Use to mute the sound or cancel the mute
mode.
8 Tuner/component control buttons/HOME MENU
These button controls can be accessed after you have
selected the corresponding input source button (DVD,
DVR 1, TV, etc.). The BAND, T.EDIT and PTY SEARCH
tuner controls are explained on page 41 to page 43.
Set the operation selector switch to RCV to access the
following controls:
AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the Audio
options (page 94).
MPX – Switches between stereo and mono reception
of FM broadcasts. If the signal is weak, then
switching to mono will improve the sound quality
(page 41). NOISE CUT MODE 1 to 2 can be selected
when receiving AM broadcasts.
EON – Use to search for programs that are
broadcasting traffic or news information (page 43).
Set the operation selector switch to RCV first to access:
STATUS – Press to check selected receiver settings
(page 98).
PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off Phase Control
or Full Band Phase Control (page 11).
CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel,
then use / to adjust the level (page 59).
11 Receiver controls
AUTO/DIRECT – Press to select Auto Surround
(page 35) or Stream Direct (page 38) listening.
STEREO/A.L.C. – Switches between the stereo
playback mode (page 37) and the Front Stage
Surround Advance mode (page 37).
STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to
switch between the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and
Neo:6 options (page 35).
ADV SURR – Use to switch between the various
surround modes (page 36).
THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode
(page 36).
33
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 34 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
04
Controls and displays
12 Number buttons and other receiver/component
controls
Use the number buttons to directly select a radio
frequency (page 41) or the tracks on a CD, DVD, etc.
ENTER can be used to enter commands for TV or DTV.
After set the remote control operation switch to RCV:
SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 38).
SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and
select the amount of time before sleep (page 97).
DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display (page 97).
SR+ – Switches the SR+ mode on/off (page 69).
SBch – Use to select the surround/virtual surround
back channel mode (page 39).
MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets
(page 38).
A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an analog
input signal to prevent distortion (page 97).
GENRE – Automatically selects the most appropriate
Advanced Surround mode for the genre of the source
currently being played back (this feature is available
only when a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI
Control is connected to this receiver via HDMI)
(page 40).
SC-LX81 only: HDMI OUT – Switch the HDMI output
terminal (page 98).
Press TUNER first to access:
D.ACCESS – After pressing, you can access a radio
station directly using the number buttons (page 41).
CLASS – Switches between the three banks (classes)
of radio station presets (page 41).
13 SOURCE
Press to turn on/off other components connected to the
receiver (see page 100 for more on this).
14 Remote control illumination button
Press to turn on/off the illumination of some of the
buttons and the LCD light.1
15 Remote control operation selector switch
Set to RCV to operate the receiver, TV or SOURCE to
operate the TV or the source device.
When this switch is set to RCV, the receiver can be
controlled (used to select the white commands above the
number buttons (A.ATT, etc.)). Also use this switch to set
up surround sound (page 9, page 44).
16 VOL +/–
Use to set the listening volume.
17 MUTE
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been
muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).
Note
1 • They also light when buttons are operated or the remote control operation selector switch is switched.
• Press and hold in the remote control illumination button for 5 seconds to enable/disable the illumination function.
34
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 35 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Listening to your system
05
Chapter 5:
Listening to your system
Important
• The listening modes and many features described in
this section may not be available depending on the
current source, settings and status of the receiver.
See Listening modes with different input signal
formats on page 125 for more on this.
Listening in surround sound
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in
surround sound. However, the options available will
depend on your speaker setup and the type of source
you’re listening to.
If you connected surround back speakers, see also Using
surround back channel processing on page 39.
Auto playback
There are many ways to listen back to sources using this
receiver, but for the simplest, most direct listening option
is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically
detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.1
STATUS
TV
SOURCE
RCV
PHASE CTRL
THX
MPX
AUTO/
DIRECT
STEREO/
A.L.C.
Standard surround sound
The following modes provide basic surround sound for
stereo and multichannel sources.4
iPod CTRL
STATUS
THX
CH LEVEL
TV
SOURCE
AUTO/
DIRECT
RCV
PHASE CTRL
MPX
STEREO/
A.L.C.
CH LEVEL
EON
STANDARD ADV SURR
PGM
BD MENU
EON
CH
VOL
VOL
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
DIMMER
AUDIO
STANDARD ADV SURR
PGM
SR+
SBch
MCACC
BD MENU
CH
VOL
VOL
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
SR+
1
SBch
DIMMER
AUDIO
MCACC
Set the operation selector switch to RCV.
2 While listening to a source, press AUTO/DIRECT
(AUTO SURR/STREAM DIRECT)2 for auto playback of a
source.
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before
showing the decoding or playback format. Check the
digital format indicators in the front panel display to see
how the source is being processed.3
• When listening to the FM Radio, the Neural THX
feature is selected automatically (see Using Neural
THX on page 41 for more on this).
1
Set the operation selector switch to RCV.
2 While listening to a source, press STANDARD
(STANDARD SURROUND).
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.
• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround
encoded, the proper decoding format will
automatically be selected and shows in the display.5
With two channel sources, you can select from:
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to movie sources
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to music sources6
• 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to video games
• 2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound
from the surround speakers is mono)
• Neo:6 CINEMA – 7.1 channel sound, especially
suited to movie sources
Note
1 • Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly using Neo:6 CINEMA or 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE (see Listening in surround
sound above for more on these decoding formats).
• The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones.
2 For more options using this button, see Using Stream Direct on page 38.
3 Neural THX is selected when Neural Radio is accessed with the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input. However, Stereo is selected when a category
other than Neural Radio is accessed.
4 In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers.
5 If surround back channel processing (page 39) is switched OFF, or the surround back speakers are set to NO (this happens automatically if
the Surround back speaker setting on page 57 is set to anything but Normal), 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).
6 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: C. WIDTH,
DIMENSION and PANORAMA. See Setting the Audio options on page 94 to adjust them.
35
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 36 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Listening to your system
05
• Neo:6 MUSIC – 7.1 channel sound, especially suited
to music sources1
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC
• Neural THX – Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially
suited to music sources2
• 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME+THX GAMES
With multichannel sources, if you have connected
surround back speaker(s) and have selected SBch ON, you
can select (according to format):
• Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
• THX Ultra2/Select2 GAMES4
With multichannel sources, press THX repeatedly to
select from:
• THX Surround EX – Allows you to hear 6.1 or 7.1
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above (only available
when you’re using two surround back speakers)
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above
• THX Ultra2/Select2 CINEMA4 – Allows you to hear
7.1 channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
• Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back channel
sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure
decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital
Surround EX)
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC
• THX Ultra2/Select2 MUSIC4 – This mode is suited
not only for sources recorded in Dolby Digital and
DTS, but also to all multi-channel music sources
(DVD-Audio, etc.).
• DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback
with DTS-ES encoded sources
• DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback
with DTS encoded sources
• THX Ultra2/Select2 GAMES4 – This mode is suited
to playing the sound of games.
Using the Home THX modes
THX and Home THX are technical standards created by
THX Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. Home THX
is designed to make home theater audio sound more like
what you hear in a cinema.
Different THX options will be available depending on the
source and the setting for surround back channel
processing (see Using surround back channel processing
on page 39 for more on this).
Using the Advanced surround effects
The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety
of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced
Surround modes are designed to be used with film
soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music
sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks
to see which you like.
iPod CTRL
STATUS
THX
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
PHASE CTRL
CH LEVEL
TV
TV
RCV
THX
MPX
VOL
VOL
AUTO/
DIRECT
STEREO/
A.L.C.
STANDARD ADV SURR
PGM
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
DIMMER
AUDIO
TVCONTROL
2 Press THX (HOME THX) to select a listening mode.3
With two channel sources, press THX repeatedly to select
a matrix-decoding process for the THX CINEMA mode
(see Listening in surround sound on page 35 for an
explanation of each process):
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA
• Neo:6 CINEMA+THX CINEMA
STEREO/
A.L.C.
STANDARD ADV SURR
PGM
VOL
VOL
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
SR+
Set the operation selector switch to RCV.
• 2 PRO LOGIC+THX CINEMA
AUTO/
DIRECT
RCV
EON
BD MENU
1
SOURCE
BD MENU
CH
CH
CH LEVEL
EON
TUNE
STATUS
SOURCE
PHASE CTRL
MPX
1
SBch
DIMMER
AUDIO
MCACC
Set the operation selector switch to RCV.
2 Press ADV SURR (ADVANCED SURROUND)
repeatedly to select a listening mode.5
• ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic
soundtracks
• DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog
• SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots of
special effects
• MONO FILM – Creates surround sound from mono
soundtracks
Note
1 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image effect (see Setting the Audio
options on page 94).
2 Neural THX can be selected for 2-channel signals for which the input signal is PCM 48 kHz or less or for analog 2-channel signals.
3 • If you only have one surround back speaker connected, THX Ultra2 GAMES (SC-LX81)/THX Select2 GAMES (SC-LX71) is not available.
• You can’t use the THX modes when headphones are connected.
4 Ultra2 for the SC-LX81, Select2 for the SC-LX71.
5 • Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected, you may not get sound from the surround back speakers in your setup.
For more on this, refer to Using surround back channel processing on page 39.
• If you press ADV SURR when the headphones are connected, the PHONES SURROUND mode will automatically be selected.
36
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 37 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Listening to your system
05
• ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources
• EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo field
1
2 While listening to a source, press STEREO/A.L.C. for
stereo playback.
Press repeatedly to switch between:
• TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound for both
mono and stereo TV sources
• ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video games
• STEREO – The audio is heard with your surround
settings and you can still use the Midnight,
Loudness, and Tone functions.
• SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs
• A.L.C. – Listening in Auto level control stereo mode.
• CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound
• F.S.SURR FOCUS – See Using Front Stage Surround
Advance below for more on this.
• ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for rock
and/or pop music
• F.S.SURR WIDE – See Using Front Stage Surround
Advance below for more on this.
• UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music sources
• EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a stereo
source, using all of your speakers
• PHONES SURR. – When listening through
headphones, you can still get the effect of overall
surround
Using Front Stage Surround Advance
The Front Stage Surround Advance function allows you to
create natural surround sound effects using just the front
speakers and the subwoofer.
iPod CTRL
Tip
STATUS
THX
• When an Advanced Surround listening mode is
selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the
EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on
page 94.
TV
SOURCE
AUTO/
DIRECT
RCV
In the Auto level control stereo mode (A.L.C.), this
receiver equalizes playback sound levels if each sound
level varies with the music source recorded in a portable
audio player.
STATUS
THX
TV
SOURCE
AUTO/
DIRECT
RCV
PHASE CTRL
MPX
STEREO/
A.L.C.
CH LEVEL
EON
CH
VOL
VOL
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
VOL
VOL
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
SR+
1
SBch
SBch
DIMMER
AUDIO
MCACC
Set the operation selector switch to RCV.
2 While listening to a source, press STEREO/A.L.C. to
select Front Stage Surround Advance modes.
• STEREO – See Listening in stereo above for more on
this.
• A.L.C. – See Listening in stereo above for more on
this.
• F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich surround
sound effect directed to the center of where the front
left and right speakers sound projection area
converges.
• F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround sound
effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode.2
STANDARD ADV SURR
PGM
BD MENU
CH
STANDARD ADV SURR
BD MENU
1
When you select STEREO, you will hear the source
through just the front left and right speakers (and
possibly your subwoofer depending on your speaker
settings). Dolby Digital, DTS and WMA9 Pro
multichannel sources are downmixed to stereo.
STEREO/
A.L.C.
CH LEVEL
EON
PGM
SR+
Listening in stereo
PHASE CTRL
MPX
DIMMER
AUDIO
MCACC
Set the operation selector switch to RCV.
FOCUS position
(Recommended)
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
WIDE position
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
Note
1 Use with Dolby Pro Logic for a stereo surround effect (stereo field is wider than Standard modes with Dolby Digital sources).
2 When using F.S.SURR WIDE, a better effect can be obtained if the Full Auto MCACC procedure under Advanced MCACC is performed. For
more on this, refer to Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 9.
37
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 38 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Listening to your system
05
Using Stream Direct
Selecting MCACC presets
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the
truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary
signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the
pure analog or digital sound source (see Stream direct
with different input signal formats on page 130).
STATUS
PHASE CTRL
THX
MPX
AUTO/
DIRECT
STEREO/
A.L.C.
CH LEVEL
• Default setting: MEMORY 1
If you have calibrated your system for different listening
positions2, you can switch between settings to suit the
kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting
(for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a
video game close to the TV).
EON
PGM
TV
SOURCE
RCV
BD MENU
STANDARD ADV SURR
PGM
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
DIMMER
AUDIO
BD MENU
CH
VOL
VOL
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
TV
AUDIO
SOURCE
RCV
SR+
SBch
MCACC
DISP
SR+
1
DIMMER
SBch
CH
MCACC
VOL
A.ATT
GENRE HDMI OUT
VOL
Set the operation selector switch to RCV.
D.ACCESS
CLASS
2 While listening to a source, press AUTO/DIRECT
(AUTO SURROUND/STREAM DIRECT) to select the
mode you want.
Check the digital format indicators in the front panel
display to see how the source is being processed.
• AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on page 35.
• DIRECT – Sources are heard according to the
settings made in the Surround Setup (speaker
setting, channel level, speaker distance, acoustic
calibration EQ, and X-curve), as well as with dual
mono, the input attenuator, and any sound delay and
hi-bit/hi-sampling (SC-LX71 only) settings. You will
hear sources according to the number of channels in
the signal.
1
CH
ENTER
TVCONTROL
Set the operation selector switch to RCV.
2 While listening to a source, press MCACC.
Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets3
or to switch calibration off. See Data Management on
page 54 to check and manage your current settings.
Choosing the input signal
On this receiver, it is possible to switch the input signals
for the different inputs as described below.4
AUTO/
DIRECT
STEREO/
A.L.C.
STANDARD ADV SURR
PGM
BD MENU
TV
• PURE DIRECT – Analog and 2 channel PCM sources
are heard without any digital processing.1 No sound
is output from the Speaker B in this mode.
CH
SOURCE
VOL
RCV
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
SR+
DIMMER
AUDIO
MCACC
VOL
DISP
A.ATT
1
SBch
GENRE HDMI OUT
Set the operation selector switch to RCV.
2 Press SIGNAL SEL (SIGNAL SELECT) to select the
input signal corresponding to the source component.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
• AUTO – This is the default setting. The receiver
selects the first available signal in the following order:
HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.
• ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.
• DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal.
Note
1 There are cases where a brief noise is heard before playback of sources other than PCM. Please select AUTO SURROUND or DIRECT if this
is a problem.
2 Different presets might also have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.
These presets can be set in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 9 or Automatic MCACC
(Expert) on page 45, either of which you should have already completed.
3 • These settings have no effect when headphones are connected.
• You can also press / to select the MCACC preset.
4 • This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96 kHz / 24 bit) and WMA9 Pro digital signal
formats. The compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, WMA9 Pro, PCM (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz
sampling frequencies), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio, SACD and DVD Audio (including 192 kHz).
With other digital signal formats, set to ANALOG (the MULTI CH IN, TUNER and PHONO).
• You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the proper digital
connections (page 23) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.
• Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player.
38
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 39 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Listening to your system
05
1
• HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.1
2
• PCM – Only PCM signals are output. The receiver
selects the first available signal in the following order:
HDMI; DIGITAL.
When set to DIGITAL or AUTO, 2 DIGITAL lights with
Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus decoding, 2 HD
lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding, DTS lights with DTS
or DTS-HD decoding, and WMA9 Pro lights to indicate
that a WMA9 Pro signal is being decoded.
You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1 or 7.1
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby
Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you can choose to always use
6.1 or 7.1 decoding (for example, with 5.1 encoded
material). With 5.1 encoded sources, a surround back
channel will be generated, but the material may sound
better in the 5.1 format for which it was originally
encoded (in which case, you can simply switch surround
back channel processing off).
The table below indicates when you will hear the
surround back channel when playing various kinds of
sources (=Sound plays through surround back
speaker(s)).
BD MENU
TV
RCV
SBch
DIMMER
VOL
A.ATT
CLASS
The table indicates when you will hear the virtual
surround back channel (=Virtual surround back
channel is active).
• VirtualSB AUTO – Virtual Surround Back is
automatically applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for
example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)
GENRE HDMI OUT
VOL
D.ACCESS
When you’re not using surround back speakers,
selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround
back channel through your surround speakers. You can
choose to listen to sources with no surround back
channel information, or if the material sounds better in
the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally
encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect
to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES.3
• VirtualSB ON – Virtual Surround Back is always used
(for example, on 5.1 encoded material)
AUDIO
MCACC
DISP
CH
• SBch AUTO – Automatically switches to 6.1 or 7.1
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example,
Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES).
• Press SBch repeatedly to cycle the virtual surround
back channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
PGM
SR+
• SBch ON – 6.1 or 7.1 decoding is always used (for
example, a surround back channel will be generated
for 5.1 encoded material).
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode
• Default setting: SBch ON
SOURCE
2 Press SBch repeatedly to cycle the surround back
channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
• SBch OFF – No sound is output from the surround
back speakers (Maximum 5.1 ch playback).
Using surround back channel
processing
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
Set the operation selector switch to RCV.
CH
ENTER
• VirtualSB OFF – Virtual Surround Back mode is
switched off
Type of source
Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES 5.1 ch
sources with 6.1 ch flagged
Dolby Digital/DTS/SACD and DVDAudio 5.1 ch sources
SBch
Standard / THX
Processing /
Stereo sources
Virtual SB Multichannel
sources
2 Pro Logic IIx 2 Pro Logic
mode
Advanced
surround
Neo:6
ON


AUTO


ON


AUTO
c

Note
1 When the HDMI option in Setting the Audio options on page 94 is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this
receiver.
2 • This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.
• When PCM is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.
3 • You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the THX, stereo, Front
Stage Surround Advance or Stream Direct mode is selected.
• You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set to NO in the Speaker Setting on
page 57.
• The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information.
39
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 40 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
05
Listening to your system
SBch
Standard / THX
Processing /
Stereo sources
Virtual SB Multichannel
sources
2
Pro
Logic
IIx
2 Pro Logic
mode
Type of source
Dolby Digital/DTS/PCM/SACD/
WMA9 Pro and DVD-Audio stereo
sources
ON

AUTO
b
Analog 2-channel (stereo) sources
ON

AUTO
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/
Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/
WMA9 Pro encoded and PCM 6.1 ch/
7.1 ch sources
Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/
WMA9 Pro encoded and PCM 5.1 ch
sources
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/
DTS-EXPRESS encoded 5.1 ch
sources
a
b

Neo:6








ON

d
AUTO

d
ON

d
AUTO
c
d
ON
e
d
e
d
AUTO
Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD
encoded stereo sources
a
Advanced
surround

ON

AUTO
b
a
d
d
ON
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/
DTS-EXPRESS encoded stereo
sources
AUTO
a.Only applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode.
b.Not applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode.
c.SC-LX81: Sound is output from the surround back speakers only when THX Ultra2 CINEMA, THX Ultra2 MUSIC or THX Ultra2 GAMES is
selected.
SC-LX71: Sound is output from the surround back speakers only when THX Select2 CINEMA, THX Select2 MUSIC or THX Select2 GAMES is
selected.
d.Advanced surround mode may not be available depending on the input signal.
e.Only applicable when two surround back speakers are connected. Also, depending on the input signal, it may happen that no sound is output
from the surround back speakers.
1
Using the genre synchronizing function
This feature automatically selects the most appropriate
Advanced Surround mode for the source currently being
played back on a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI
Control connected to this receiver via HDMI.1 For details
on HDMI Control, see HDMI Control on page 87.
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
SR+
SBch
DIMMER
Set the operation selector switch to RCV.
2 Press GENRE while the source assigned to a genre
is being played back.
The most appropriate Advanced Surround mode for the
source being played back is automatically selected.
AUDIO
MCACC
DISP
TV
SOURCE
CH
VOL
A.ATT
RCV
D.ACCESS
VOL
GENRE HDMI OUT
CLASS
CH
ENTER
CLR
TVCONTROL
Note
1 • This feature is available only when the source being played back is assigned to a genre. When the source has no genre assigned to, NO
GENRE appears showing that this feature is not available.
• Make sure that HDMI Control is set to ON. When OFF is selected, CANNOT SELECT appears showing that this feature is not available (see
Setting the HDMI options on page 88).
40
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 41 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Using the tuner
06
Chapter 6:
Using the tuner
Using Neural THX
Listening to the radio
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and
AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and
manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the
frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a
station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can
memorize the frequency for recall later—see Saving
station presets below for more on how to do this.
DVD
BD
DVR1
DVR2
VIDEO1
VIDEO2
VIDEO3
TV
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
TUNER
TUNE +
CD-R
MENU
T.EDIT
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
SR+
SBch
DIMMER
ST
ENTER
PTY
SEARCH
ST +
GENRE HDMI OUT
RETURN
D.ACCESS
PHASE CTRL
THX
MPX
AUTO/
DIRECT
STEREO/
A.L.C.
CH
ENTER
TUNE
STATUS
CLASS
CH LEVEL
See About Neural – THX Surround on page 123 for more
on this.
The Neural THX mode can be selected also with
STANDARD.
Tuning directly to a station
DISP
A.ATT
• While listening to FM radio, press AUTO/DIRECT for
Neural THX listening.
AUDIO
MCACC
PHONO
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
1
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TOOLS
TOP MENU
BAND
INPUT SELECT
HDMI
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
This feature uses Neural Surround™, THX® technologies
to achieve optimal surround sound from FM radio.
CLR
Sometimes, you’ll already know the frequency of the
station you want to listen to. In this case, you can simply
enter the frequency directly using the number buttons on
the remote control.
EON
STANDARD ADV SURR
Press TUNER to select the tuner.
2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if
necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.
3 Tune to a station.
There are three ways to do this:
Automatic tuning – To search for stations in the
currently selected band, press and hold TUNE +/–
(/) for about a second. The receiver will start
searching for the next station, stopping when it has
found one. Repeat to search for other stations.
Manual tuning – To change the frequency one step
at a time, press TUNE +/– (/).
High speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE +/– (/
) for high speed tuning. Release the button at the
frequency you want.
Improving FM sound
If the TUNED or STEREO indicators don’t light when
tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press
MPX to switch the receiver into mono reception mode.
This should improve the sound quality and allow you to
enjoy the broadcast.
1
Press TUNER to select the tuner.
2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if
necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.
3
Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).
4 Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of
the radio station.
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.
If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS
twice to cancel the frequency and start over.
Saving station presets
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s
convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for
easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station.
This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This
receiver can memorize up to 30 stations, stored in three
banks, or classes (A, B and C) of 10 stations each. When
saving an FM frequency, the MPX setting (see page 41) is
also stored.
DVD
BD
DVR1
DVR2
VIDEO1
VIDEO2
VIDEO3
TV
CD-R
PHONO
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
TUNE +
TOP MENU
BAND
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TOOLS
MENU
T.EDIT
ST
ENTER
PGM
BD MENU
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
ST +
SR+
RETURN
A.ATT
SBch
DIMMER
DISP
INPUT SELECT
Using the noise cut mode
HDMI
TUNER
PTY
SEARCH
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
The two noise cut modes can be used when receiving AM
broadcasts. Press MPX to select the noise cut mode (1 to
2).
AUDIO
MCACC
STATUS
TUNE
D.ACCESS
PHASE CTRL
CH LEVEL
GENRE HDMI OUT
CLASS
CH
ENTER
CLR
SOURCE
THX
MPX
AUTO/
DIRECT
STEREO/
A.L.C.
EON
STANDARD ADV SURR
PGM
41
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 42 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
06
Using the tuner
1 Tune to a station you want to memorize.
See Listening to the radio on page 41 for more on this.
2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).
The display shows STATION MEMORY, then a blinking
memory class.
3 Press CLASS to select one of the three classes, then
press ST +/– (/) to select the station preset you
want.
You can also use the number buttons to select a station
preset.
4 Press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop
blinking and the receiver stores the station.
Naming station presets
For easier identification, you can name your station
presets.
Listening to station presets
You will need to have some presets stored to do this. See
Saving station presets above if you haven’t done this
already.
1
Press TUNER to select the tuner.
2 Press CLASS to select the class in which the station
is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A, B and C.
3 Press ST +/– (/) to select the station preset you
want.
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote
control to recall the station preset.
An introduction to RDS
1 Choose the station preset you want to name.
See Listening to station presets below for how to do this.
Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM
radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of
information—the name of the station and the kind of
show they’re broadcasting, for example.
2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).
The display shows STATION NAME, then a blinking
cursor at the first character position.
One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of
program. For example, you can search for a station that’s
broadcasting a show with the program type, JAZZ.
3 Input the name you want.
Choose from the following characters for a name up to
four characters long.
You can search the following program types:1
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789
!”#$%&’()∗+,–./:;<=>[email protected][ \ ]^_{|} ˜ [space]
Use / to select a character, / to set the position,
and ENTER to confirm your selection.
Tip
• To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1 to 3
and input four spaces instead of a name.
• Once you have named a station preset, you can press
DISP when listening to a station to switch the display
between name and frequency.
NEWS – News
AFFAIRS – Current Affairs
INFO – General Information
SPORT – Sport
EDUCATE – Educational
DRAMA – Radio plays, etc.
CULTURE – National or
regional culture, theater, etc.
SCIENCE – Science and
technology
VARIED – Usually talk-based
material, such as quiz shows
or interviews.
POP M – Pop music
ROCK M – Rock music
EASY M – Easy listening
LIGHT M – ‘Light’ classical
music
CLASSICS – ‘Serious’ classical
music
OTHER M – Music not fitting
above categories
WEATHER – Weather reports
FINANCE – Stock market
reports, commerce, trading,
etc.
CHILDREN – Programs for
children
SOCIAL – Social affairs
RELIGION – Programs
concerning religion
PHONE IN – Public expressing
their views by phone
TRAVEL – Holiday-type travel
rather than traffic
announcements
LEISURE – Leisure interests
and hobbies
JAZZ – Jazz
COUNTRY – Country music
NATION M – Popular music in
a language other than English
OLDIES – Popular music from
the ’50s and ’60s
FOLK M – Folk music
DOCUMENT – Documentary
Note
1 In addition, there are three other program types, ALARM, NO DATA and NO TYPE. ALARM is used for emergency announcements. You can’t search
for these. NO DATA and NO TYPE appear when a program type cannot be found.
42
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 43 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Using the tuner
06
Searching for RDS programs
One of the most useful features of RDS is the ability to
search for a particular kind of radio program. You can
search for any of the program types listed above.
VIDEO1
VIDEO2
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
VIDEO3
TV
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
TUNE +
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TOOLS
TUNER
CD-R
PHONO
TOP MENU
BAND
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
STATUS
DIMMER
AUDIO
MENU
T.EDIT
SR+
ST
ENTER
PTY
SEARCH
1
BD MENU
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
INPUT SELECT
HDMI
PGM
RETURN
MCACC
DISP
A.ATT
D.ACCESS
TUNE
PHASE CTRL
SBch
ST +
CH LEVEL
GENRE HDMI OUT
CLASS
CH
ENTER
Using EON
When EON (Enhanced Other Network information) is
turned on, the receiver jumps to an EON-linked
broadcast when it begins, even if a receiver function
other than the tuner is being used. It can’t be used in
areas that EON information isn’t transmitted and when
FM broadcast stations don’t transmit PTY data. When the
broadcast ends, the tuner returns to the original
frequency or function.
Press TUNER to select the FM band.1
VIDEO1
2 Press the PTY SEARCH button.
SEARCH shows in the display.
5 If you want to keep listening to the station, press
ENTER within the five seconds.
If you don’t press ENTER, searching resumes.
If NO PTY is displayed it means the tuner couldn’t find
that program type at the time of the search.2
Displaying RDS information
Use the DISP button to display the different types of RDS
information available.3
VIDEO3
DVR2
CD-R
PHONO
HDMI
SETUP
iPod CTRL
STATUS
INPUT SELECT
THX
TUNE
PHASE CTRL
MPX
CH LEVEL
EON
TUNER
AUTO/
DIRECT
STEREO/
A.L.C.
STANDARD ADV SURR
PGM
3 Press ST +/– (/) to select the program type you
want to hear.
4 Press ENTER to search for the program type.
The system starts searching through the station presets
for a match. When it finds one, the search stops and the
station plays for five seconds.
VIDEO2
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
BD MENU
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
1
Press TUNER to select the FM
DIMMER
AUDIO
band.4
2 Press EON to select one of the possible modes.
Press repeatedly to switch between:
• EON TA (Traffic Announcement) – Sets the tuner to
pick up traffic information when it is broadcast.
• EON NEWS – Sets the tuner to pick up news when it
is broadcast.
• OFF – Switches off the EON feature.
When set to TA or NEWS, the EON indicator in the
display lights (it flashes when receiving an EON
broadcast).5 The indicator in the display lights when
the current station carries the EON service.6
• Press DISP for RDS information.
Each press changes the display as follows:
• Radio Text (RT) – Messages sent by the radio station.
For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone
number as RT.
• Program Service Name (PS) – The name of the radio
station.
• Program Type (PTY) – This indicates the kind of
program currently being broadcast.
• Current tuner frequency.
Note
1 RDS is only possible in the FM band.
2 RDS searches station presets only. If no stations have been preset, or if the program type could not be found among the station presets NO PTY is
displayed. FINISH means the search is complete.
3 • If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly.
• If you see NO RADIO TEXT DATA in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station. The display will automatically switch to the
PS data display (if no PS data, the frequency is displayed).
• In the PTY display, NO DATA or NONE may be shown. In this case, the PS display is shown after a few seconds.
4 EON is only possible in the FM band.
5 You can’t search for traffic announcements and news at the same time.
6 • You cannot operate the T.EDIT and PTY SEARCH buttons while the EON indicator in the display is lit.
• If you want to change to a function other than the tuner when the EON indicator is flashing, press EON to turn EON off.
43
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 44 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
07
The Advanced MCACC menu
Chapter 7:
The Advanced MCACC menu
Making receiver settings from the
Advanced MCACC menu
The Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel ACoustic
Calibration) system was developed in Pioneer’s
laboratories with the aim of making it possible for home
users to perform adjustments of the same level as in a
studio easily and with high precision. The acoustic
characteristics of the listening environment are
measured and the frequency response is calibrated
accordingly to allow high precision, automatic analysis
and optimal calibration of the sound field to bring it
closer to a studio environment than ever before.
Furthermore, while it was previously difficult to eliminate
standing waves, this receiver is equipped with a standing
wave control function using a unique process to perform
acoustic analysis and reduce their influence.
This section describes how to calibrate the sound field
automatically and fine-adjust the sound field data
manually.
RECEIVER
MAIN
ZONE2
CH
DVD
BD
DVR1
VIDEO1
VIDEO2
VIDEO3
TV
CD-R
PHONO
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
TV
SOURCE
3
MULTI
OPERATION
SOURCE
RCV
VOL
VOL
DVR2
TV CONTROL
INPUT
MUTE
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
TUNE +
MUTE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TOOLS
INPUT SELECT
HDMI
TUNER
TOP MENU
BAND
ST
MENU
T.EDIT
ENTER
PTY
SEARCH
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
STATUS
ST +
RETURN
TUNE
PHASE CTRL
3 Select ‘Advanced MCACC’ from the HOME MENU,
then press ENTER.
HOME MENU
A/V RECEIVER
1. Advanced MCACC
2. MCACC Data Check
3. Data Management
4. System Setup
Exit
4
Return
Select the setting you want to adjust.
1.Advanced MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
a. Full Auto MCACC
b. Auto MCACC
c. Manual MCACC
d. Demo
Exit
Return
• Full Auto MCACC – See Automatically setting up for
surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
on page 9 for a quick and effective automatic
surround setup.
• Auto MCACC – See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on
page 45 for a more detailed MCACC setup. In
addition, the Full Band Phase Control function
calibrates the frequency-phase characteristics of the
connected speakers.
• Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker settings
and customize the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see
Manual MCACC setup on page 47).
CH LEVEL
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use RECEIVER to switch on.1
• If headphones are connected to the receiver,
disconnect them.
• Demo – No settings are saved and no errors occur.
When the speakers are connected to this receiver,
the test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to
cancel the test tone.
2 Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then press
HOME MENU.2
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use /
// and ENTER to navigate through the screens
and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and
exit the current menu.
• Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME
MENU.
Note
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the HOME MENU.
2 You can’t use the HOME MENU when the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input source is selected (in either the main or sub zone). When you set
ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or ZONE 2&3 to ON (page 66), you can’t use the HOME MENU.
44
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 45 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
The Advanced MCACC menu
07
2 Select the parameters you want to set.
Use / to select the item, then use / to set.
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
If your setup requires more detailed settings than those
provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound
(MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 9, you can
customize your setup options below. You can calibrate
your system differently for up to six different MCACC
presets1, which are useful if you have different listening
positions depending on the type of source (for example,
watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game
close to the TV).2
Important
• Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved
during the Auto MCACC Setup.
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.3
• The screen saver will automatically appear after five
minutes of inactivity.
Caution
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are
output at high volume.
1 Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the Advanced MCACC
menu, then press ENTER.
If the Advanced MCACC screen is not displayed, refer to
Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu
on page 44.
1.Advanced MCACC
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
a. Full Auto MCACC
b. Auto MCACC
c. Manual MCACC
d. Demo
ALL
SYMMETRY : M1.MEMORY 1
ALL CH ADJ : M2.MEMORY 2
FRONT ALIGH : M3.MEMORY 3
THX Speaker :
NO
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
EQ Pro. & S-Wave
FULL BAND
PHASE CTRL
START
Exit
Return
Exit
Return
1b.Auto MCACC
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
ALL
SYMMETRY : M1.MEMORY 1
ALL CH ADJ : M2.MEMORY 2
FRONT ALIGH : M3.MEMORY 3
THX Speaker :
NO
A/V RECEIVER
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
EQ Pro. & S-Wave
FULL BAND
PHASE CTRL
ALL
SYMMETRY : M1.MEMORY 1
ALL CH ADJ : M2.MEMORY 2
FRONT ALIGH : M3.MEMORY 3
THX Speaker :
NO
START
Exit
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
EQ Pro. & S-Wave
FULL BAND
PHASE CTRL
START
Return
Exit
Return
• Auto MCACC – The default is ALL (recommended),
but you can limit the system calibration to only one
setting (to save time) if you want.4 The available
options are ALL, Keep SP System,5 Speaker
Setting, Channel Level, Speaker Distance, EQ Pro.
& S-Wave and FULL BAND PHASE CTRL.
• EQ Type (only available when the Auto MCACC
Menu above is EQ Pro. & S-Wave) – This determines
how the frequency balance is adjusted.
After a single calibration is performed, each of the
following three correction curves can be stored
separately in the MCACC memory. SYMMETRY (default)
implements symmetric correction for each pair of left
and right speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude
characteristics. ALL CH ADJUST is a ‘flat’ setting where
all the speakers are set individually so no special
weighting is given to any one channel. FRONT ALIGN6
sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker
settings (no equalization is applied to the front left and
right channels).
• THX Speaker (only available when the Auto MCACC
Menu above is ALL or Speaker Setting) – Select YES
if you are using THX speakers (set all speakers to
SMALL), otherwise leave it set to NO.
• Stand.Wave Multi-Point (only available when the
Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro. & S-Wave) – In
addition to measurements at the listening position,
you can use two more reference points for which test
tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is
useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration
Note
These are stored in memory and referred to as MEMORY1 to MEMORY6 until you rename them in Data Management on page 54.
You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.
Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter (i.e. channel level) from the Auto MCACC menu (step 2).
• The EQ Pro. & S-Wave measurement is also taken when ALL, Keep SP System and EQ Pro & S-Wave are selected. See Acoustic Calibration
EQ Professional on page 50 for more on this.
• Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset. For
details, see Setting the Audio options on page 94.
• The FULL BAND PHASE CTRL measurement is also taken when ALL or FULL BAND PHASE CTRL are selected.
5 The Keep SP System option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting (page 57) unchanged.
6 If you selected ALL as your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the ALL CH ADJUST and FRONT
ALIGN settings.
1
2
3
4
45
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 46 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
The Advanced MCACC menu
07
for several seating positions in your listening area.1
Place the microphone at the reference point
indicated on-screen and note the last microphone
placement will be at your main listening position:
2nd reference
point
3rd reference
point
1
2
7 If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in
the OSD.2
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the
actual speakers you have.
3
Main listening
position
3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC
jack on the front panel.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers
and the microphone.
AUDIO
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient
noise! or Check microphone) select RETRY after
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when
using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 10) and
verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to
be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and
continue.
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in
step 8.
1b.Auto MCACC
VIDEO
TUNER EDIT
AUTO SURR/ HOME
BAND STREAM DIRECT THX
STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO/
SURROUND SURROUND
A.L.C.
CONTROL
ON/OFF
Now Analyzing...
VIDEO3 INPUT
(ST)
ENTER
iPod DIRECT
USB
RETURN
DIGITAL IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
MCACC
SETUP MIC
PHONES
L
C
R
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW
10
OK
Environment Check
Ambient Noise
: OK
Microphone
:
Speaker YES/NO :
Exit
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that
it’s about ear level at your normal listening position.
Otherwise, place the microphone at ear level using a
table or a chair.
4 When you’re finished settings the options, select
START then press ENTER.
5
A/V RECEIVER
2/10
(ST)
(TUNE)
HOME MENU
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
SPEAKERS
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
Follow the instructions on-screen.
• Make sure the microphone is connected.
• If you’re using a subwoofer, it is automatically
detected every time you switch on the system. Make
sure it is on and the volume is turned up.
Cancel
6 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish
outputting test tones.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while
it’s doing this.
• Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This
may result in incorrect speaker settings.
En
RETRY
Cancel
If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side
column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t
correct), there may be a problem with the speaker
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the
power and check the speaker connections. If there
doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use /
to select the speaker and / to change the setting
(and number for surround back) and continue.
8 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the
optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker
distance, and Acoustic Calibration EQ.
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
Now Analyzing...
Now Analyzing...
Surround Analysis
Speaker System
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
Standing Wave
Reverb
Aco Cal EQ Pro.
Subwoofer Check :
Exit
Cancel
5/10
: OK
:
:
:
:
:
Exit
Cancel
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is
happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
• If you selected a Stand.Wave Multi-Point setup (in
step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd
and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at
your main listening position.
Note
1 Switch the Multi-Point setting NO if you only use one listening position.
2 This screen is only shown if you selected ALL or Speaker Setting from the Auto MCACC menu.
46
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Exit
1b.Auto MCACC
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on
page 10 for notes regarding high background noise
levels and other possible interference.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
SCLX81_71.book Page 47 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
The Advanced MCACC menu
9 The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! The MCACC
Data Check screen appears.
Manual MCACC setup
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup
menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more
familiar with the system. Before making these settings,
you should have already completed Automatically setting
up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
on page 9.
2.MCACC Data Check
A/V RECEIVER
a. Speaker Setting
b. Channel Level
c. Speaker Distance
d. Standing Wave
e. Acoustic Cal EQ
f. Group Delay
g. Output PC
Exit
07
Return
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the
Manual MCACC setup menu (starting below) or Manual
SP Setup menu (starting on page 56).1
You can also choose to view the settings by selecting
individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check
screen:
• Speaker Setting – The size and number of speakers
you’ve connected (see page 57 for more on this)
• Channel Level – The overall balance of your speaker
system (see page 48 or 58 for more on this)
• Speaker Distance – The distance of your speakers
from the listening position (see page 48 or 59 for
more on this)2
• Standing Wave – Filter settings to control lower
‘boomy’ frequencies (see page 49 for more on this)
You only need to make these settings once (unless you
change the placement of your current speaker system or
add new speakers).
Caution
• The test tones used in the Manual MCACC setup are
output at high volume.
Important
• You will need to first specify the MCACC preset you
want to adjust by pressing MCACC before pressing
HOME MENU (step 2 in Making receiver settings from
the Advanced MCACC menu on page 44). When
Manual MCACC is selected while MCACC is set to
OFF, the selection screen for the MCACC memory
appears. Select a memory to adjust manually.
1c.Manual MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Select MCACC memory.
MCACC OFF
• Acoustic Cal EQ – Adjustments to the frequency
balance of your speaker system based on the
acoustic characteristics of your room (see page 49
for more on this)
• Group Delay – The original characteristics of group
delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted
characteristics can be displayed graphically (see
Using Full Band Phase Control on page 12 for more on
this).
Press RETURN after you have finished checking each
screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back
to the HOME MENU.
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver
upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup.
M1.MEMORY 1
Exit
Cancel
• For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect
the setup microphone to the front panel and place it
about ear level at your normal listening position.
Press HOME MENU to display the HOME MENU
before you connect the microphone to this receiver. If
the microphone is connected while the HOME
MENU is not being displayed, the display will change
to the Full Auto MCACC under Advanced MCACC.
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on
page 10 for notes regarding high background noise
levels and other possible interference.
• If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up
the volume to the middle position.
Note
1 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size
settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 56.
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking
delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend
adjusting the settings manually.
2 Since the distance measurements have been set according to the sound characteristics of your speakers, there are cases where (for optimal
surround sound) the actual distance may differ from the speaker distance setting.
47
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 48 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
07
The Advanced MCACC menu
1 Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the Advanced
MCACC menu.
See Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC
menu on page 44 if you’re not already at this screen.
1.Advanced MCACC
1c.Manual MCACC
1c1.Fine Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
a. Full Auto MCACC
b. Auto MCACC
c. Manual MCACC
d. Demo
Exit
2 Adjust the level of the left channel.
This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want
to keep the level around 0.0dB so that you’ll have plenty
of room to adjust the other speaker levels.
A/V RECEIVER
1. Fine Channel Level
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
4. EQ Adjust
5. EQ Professional
Return
Exit
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
Reference Ch :
Ref.Ch Level :
Return
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to
make these settings in order.
• Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments to the
overall balance of your speaker system (see Fine
Channel Level below).
• Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay settings for
your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance
below).
Exit
• EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency balance
of your speaker system while listening to test tones
(see Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 49).
• EQ Professional – Calibrate your system based on
the direct sound coming from the speakers and make
detailed settings according to your room’s reverb
characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ
Professional on page 50).
Fine Channel Level
• Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)
You can achieve better surround sound by properly
adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. You
can adjust the Channel Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB
increments. The following setting can help you make
detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the
Manual speaker setup on page 56.
1 Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the Manual
MCACC setup menu.
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.
1c.Manual MCACC
1c1.Fine Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
1. Fine Channel Level
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
4. EQ Adjust
5. EQ Professional
3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels (+/
–10dB) as necessary.
Use / to adjust the volume of the speaker you
selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds
like both tones are the same volume, press  to confirm
and continue to the next channel.
1c1.Fine Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
48
En
L
R <=> L
:
0.0 dB
R
C
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
Exit
Finish
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will
change depending on which speaker you select.
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply
use / to select it.
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Fine Speaker Distance
• Default setting: 3.00m (all speakers)
For proper sound depth and separation with your system,
it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some
speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening
position at the same time. You can adjust the distance of
each speaker in 1 cm increments. The following setting
can help you make detailed adjustments that you may
not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 56.
1 Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC
setup menu.
1c.Manual MCACC
1c2.Fine SP Distance
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
1. Fine Channel Level
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
4. EQ Adjust
5. EQ Professional
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
Reference Ch :
Ref.Ch Distance :
L
3.61m
CAUTION
Loud test tones will be output.
Exit
Please wait...**
Exit
Cancel
• After pressing ENTER, test tones will be output.
• Standing Wave – Control overly resonant low
frequencies in your listening room (see Standing
Wave on page 49).
The last two settings are specifically for customizing the
parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
on page 49:
L
0.0 dB
Return
Exit
Cancel
Return
Exit
Cancel
2 Adjust the distance of the left channel from the
listening position.
SCLX81_71.book Page 49 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
The Advanced MCACC menu
3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance
as necessary.
Use / to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected
to match the reference speaker. The delay is measured in
terms of speaker distance from 0.01m to 9.00m.
1c2.Fine SP Distance
A/V RECEIVER
L
R <=> L
:
3.61m
R
C
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
07
overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During
playback of a source, you can customize the filters used
for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC
presets.3
1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC
setup menu.
1c.Manual MCACC
1c3.Standing Wave
A/V RECEIVER
3.67m
3.69m
2.26m
2.74m
5.13m
5.77m
3.54m
A/V RECEIVER
1. Fine Channel Level
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
4. EQ Adjust
5. EQ Professional
MCACC
Finish
Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the
target channel. From the listening position, face the two
speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each
speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are
arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of
you and between your arm span.1
Filter 3
Freq Q ATT Freq Q ATT Freq Q ATT TRIM
[Hz]
SW
M1.MEMORY1
Exit
Filter 2
Filter 1
Filter
Channel
63
[dB]
5.0
[Hz]
[dB]
10 120 5.0
10
[Hz]
201 5.0
[dB]
[dB]
10
+10.0
dB
0
5
10
16
Exit
Return
Exit
32
63
125
250
500
1k Hz
Finish
2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave
Control.
• Filter Channel – Select the channel to which you will
apply the filter(s): MAIN (all except center channel
and subwoofer), Center or SW (subwoofer).
• TRIM (only available when the filter channel above is
SW) – Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to
compensate for the difference in output post-filter).
When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up,
press  to confirm and continue to the next channel.
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will
change depending on which speaker you select.
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply
use / to select it.
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
• freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter parameters where
freq represents the frequency you will be targeting
and Q is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the
narrower the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation
(ATT, the amount of reduction to the targeted
frequency).
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
• Default setting: ON2/0.0dB (all channels/bands)
Standing Wave
• Default setting: ON2/ATT 0.0dB (all filters)
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain
conditions, sound waves from your speaker system
resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the
walls in your listening area. This can have a negative
effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower
frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your
listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room,
it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The
Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room
equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It
works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your
room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that
can color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’
equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the
adjustment provided in Automatically setting up for
surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on
page 9 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 45, you can
also adjust these settings manually to get a frequency
balance that suits your tastes.4
Note
1 • If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.
• For better audibility, the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone (oscillating pulses are heard from your other speakers). Note that it may be
difficult to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).
2 You can switch on or off the Standing Wave and Acoustic Calibration EQ feature in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. See Setting the Audio
options on page 94 for more on this.
3 • Since they will be overwritten, you may want to save the standing wave settings made with the Auto MCACC Setup to another MCACC preset.
• Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.
• When Standing Wave is selected for a MCACC preset memory where STAND.WAVE is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER,
STAND.WAVE ON is automatically selected.
4 When EQ Adjust is selected for a MCACC preset memory where EQ is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER, EQ ON is automatically
selected.
49
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 50 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
07
The Advanced MCACC menu
1 Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup
menu.
1c.Manual MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
1. Fine Channel Level
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
4. EQ Adjust
5. EQ Professional
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room
reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers. It
can also provide you with a graphical output of the
frequency response of your room.1
How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
Exit
Return
2 Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your
liking.
1c4.EQ Adjust
A/V RECEIVER
dB
Ch :
L
0.0
-8.0 -6.0
0.0
+3.0 +8.5 +8.5 +3.0
0.0
0.0
63
125
250
500
1k
2k
4k
8k
16k TRIM
[Hz]
[Hz]
[Hz]
[Hz]
[Hz]
[Hz]
[Hz]
[Hz]
[Hz]
MCACC
If you find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant
in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’), or that
different channels seem to exhibit different reverb
characteristics, select EQ Pro. & S-Wave (or ALL) for the
Auto MCACC setting in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on
page 45 to calibrate the room automatically. This should
provide a balanced calibration that suits the
characteristics of your listening room.
M1.MEMORY1
Exit
Finish
Use / to select the channel.
Use / to select the frequency and / to boost or
cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to the top of
the screen and press  to return to Ch, then use / to
select the channel.
• The OVER! indicator shows in the display if the
frequency adjustment is too drastic and might
distort. If this happens, bring the level down until
OVER! disappears from the display.
Tip
• Changing the frequency curve of one channel too
drastically will affect the overall balance. If the
speaker balance seems uneven, you can raise or
lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM
feature. Use / to select TRIM, then use / to
raise or lower the channel level for the current
speaker.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
If you still aren’t satisfied with the results, the manual
Advanced EQ Setup (below) provides a more
customized calibration of your system using the direct
sound of the speakers. This is done with the help of a
graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or
using a computer (with software available from Pioneer
— see Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on
page 70).
How to interpret the graphical output
The graph shows decibels on the vertical axis and time (in
milliseconds) on the horizontal axis. A straight line
indicates a flat-response room (no reverb), whereas a
sloping line indicates the presence of reverberation when
outputting test tones. The sloping line will eventually
flatten out when the reverberant sound stabilizes (this
usually takes about 100 ms or so).
By analyzing the graph, you should be able to see how
your room is responding to certain frequencies.
Differences in channel level and speaker distance are
taken into account automatically (compensation is
provided for comparison purposes), and the frequency
measurements can be examined both with and without
the equalization performed by this receiver.2
Setting Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
according to your room characteristics
Using the manual setup, you can set the time period at
which the frequency response is analyzed, pinpointing
the time that is best for system calibration with your
particular room characteristics.
Note
1 This system allows you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or using a
computer (with software available from Pioneer—see Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 70 for more on this).
2 Note that due to an effect known as ‘group delay’, lower frequencies will take longer to be generated than higher frequencies (this is most
obvious when comparing the frequencies at 0 ms). This initial slope is not a problem (i.e. excessive reverb) with your listening room.
50
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 51 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
The Advanced MCACC menu
07
The graph below shows the difference between
conventional acoustic calibration and professional
calibration (the gray circle indicates the point where the
microphone captures sound during frequency analysis).
If your room isn’t affected by the factors above, it is often
not necessary to make a 30~50ms setting. Later time
settings may provide a more detailed sound experience
with your speaker system. It is best to try and see what
works best for your particular room.
Level
Note that changing the room (for example, moving
furniture or paintings) will affect the calibration results.
In such cases, you should recalibrate your system.
Test tone
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
80
Conventional MCACC
EQ calibration range
Time
160
(in msec)
Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
1
As soon as audio is output from your speaker system, it
is influenced by room characteristics, such as walls,
furniture, and the dimensions of the room. The sooner
the frequency analysis, the less it is influenced by the
room. We recommend an earlier time setting of
30~50ms to compensate for two major factors that will
influence the sound of most rooms:
• Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies –
Depending on your room, you may find that lower
frequencies seem overly reverberant compared to
higher frequencies (i.e. your room sounds ‘boomy’).
This may result in a skewed frequency analysis if the
measurement is done too late.
Low
frequencies
Level
High
frequencies
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
80
Conventional MCACC
EQ calibration range
Time
160
(in msec)
• Reverb characteristics for different channels –
Reverb characteristics can be somewhat different for
each channel. Since this difference increases as the
sound is influenced by the various room
characteristics, it is often better to capture a
frequency analysis early on for smoother mixing of
channel frequencies/sounds.
Left
surround
Level
Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press ENTER.
1c.Manual MCACC
1c5.EQ Professional
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
1. Fine Channel Level
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
4. EQ Adjust
5. EQ Professional
a. Reverb Measurement
b. Reverb View
c. Advanced EQ Setup
Exit
2
Return
Exit
Return
Select an option and press ENTER.
• Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the
reverb characteristics of your room (for graphical
output using a PC, see Connecting a PC for Advanced
MCACC output on page 70 to connect an RS-232C
cable before selecting this option).
• Reverb View – You can check the reverb
measurements made for specified frequency ranges
in each channel.1
• Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time
period that will be used for frequency adjustment and
calibration, based on the reverb measurement of
your listening area. Note that customizing system
calibration using this setup will alter the settings you
made in Automatically setting up for surround sound
(MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 9 or
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 45 and is not
necessary if you’re satisfied with these settings.
3 If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ
ON or OFF, and then START.
1c5a.Reverb Measurement
A/V RECEIVER
MCACC
: M1.MEMORY 1
Reverb Measure with
EQ OFF
:
Right
surround
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
80
START
Conventional MCACC
EQ calibration range
Time
160
(in msec)
Exit
Cancel
Note
1 If the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 9
or Reverb Measurement operation, depending on the standing wave control setting, differences may appear on the reverb graph. With the
Auto MCACC function, the reverberations are measured with the standing waves controlled, so the reverb characteristics graph shows the
characteristics with the effect of the standing waves eliminated. By contrast, the Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations
without controlling the standing waves, so the graph indicates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves. If you wish
to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves as such), we recommend using the Reverb Measurement
function.
51
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 52 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
07
The Advanced MCACC menu
The following options determine how the reverb
characteristics of your listening area are displayed in
Reverb View and Output PC (see Connecting a PC for
Advanced MCACC output on page 70):
• EQ OFF – You will see the reverb characteristics of
your listening area without the equalization
performed by this receiver (before calibration).
• EQ ON – You will see the reverb characteristics of
your listening area with the equalization performed
by this receiver (after calibration).1 Note that the EQ
response may not appear entirely flat due to
adjustments necessary for your listening area.
When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select
Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 114
for troubleshooting information.
4 If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the
reverb characteristics for each channel. Press RETURN
when you’re done.
1c5b.Reverb View
16 kHz
8 kHz
4 kHz
2 kHz
1 kHz
500 Hz
250 Hz
125 Hz
63 Hz
L
63Hz
After
EQ:ON
M1.MEMORY 1
dB
63.0
61.0
59.0
57.0
55.0
53.0
0
40
80
120
Exit
160 ms
Return
This appears according to the setting you chose in
Reverb Measurement (step 3 above). Use / to
select the channel and the frequency you want to check.
Use / to go back and forth between the three. Note
that the markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in
2 dB steps.
5 If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, select the
MCACC memory to be stored, then enter the desired
time setting for calibration, and then select START.
Based on the reverb measurement above, you can
choose the time period that will be used for the final
frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you
can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is
best to use the measurement results as a reference for
your time setting. For an optimal system calibration
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we
recommend using the 30~50ms setting.
1c5c.Adv.EQ Setup
1c5c.Adv.EQ Setup
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
MCACC
: M1.MEMORY 1
Time Position
:
30-50ms
EQ Type
:
SYMMETRY
STAND.WAVE Multi-Point :
NO
Exit
Exit
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are
given the option to check the settings on-screen.
Checking MCACC Data
At the procedure of Automatically setting up for surround
sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 9, the
procedure of Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 45 or
after fine-adjusting at Manual MCACC setup on page 47,
you can check your calibrated settings using the onscreen display or, if a computer is connected, on the
computer’s screen.
2 Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the HOME
MENU.
HOME MENU
2.MCACC Data Check
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
1. Advanced MCACC
2. MCACC Data Check
3. Data Management
4. System Setup
Exit
3
a. Speaker Setting
b. Channel Level
c. Speaker Distance
d. Standing Wave
e. Acoustic Cal EQ
f. Group Delay
g. Output PC
Return
Exit
Return
Select the setting you want to check.
• Speaker Setting – Used to check the settings of the
speaker systems. See Speaker Setting on page 53 for
more on this.
• Channel Level – Used to check the output level of the
different speakers. See Channel Level on page 53 for
more on this.
• Standing Wave – Used to check the standing wave
control filter settings. See Standing Wave on page 53
for more on this.
START
Cancel
When you’re finished, select START. It will take about 2
to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.
• Speaker Distance – Used to check the distance to
the different speakers. See Speaker Distance on
page 53 for more on this.
MCACC
: M1.MEMORY 1
Time Position
:
30-50ms
EQ Type
:
SYMMETRY
STAND.WAVE Multi-Point :
NO
START
Select the setting from the following time periods (in
milliseconds): 0~20ms, 10~30ms, 20~40ms, 30~50ms,
40~60ms, 50~70ms and 60~80ms. This setting will be
applied to all channels during calibration.
1 Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then press
HOME MENU.
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use /
// and ENTER to navigate through the screens
and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and
exit the current menu.
A/V RECEIVER
Channel
:
Frequency :
Calibration :
Use / to select the channel, frequency, and time
setting. Use / to switch between them.
Cancel
Note
1 The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset,
exit the HOME MENU and press MCACC to select it before pressing HOME MENU.
52
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 53 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
The Advanced MCACC menu
07
• Acoustic Cal EQ – Used to check the calibration
values of the listening environment’s frequency
response. See Acoustic Cal EQ on page 54 for more
on this.
Speaker Distance
• Group Delay – Used to check the speakers’ group
delay (both before and after calibration). See Group
Delay on page 54 for more on this.
1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the MCACC Data
Check menu.
• Output PC – See Connecting a PC for Advanced
MCACC output on page 70 for more on this.
4 Press RETURN to go back to MCACC Data Check
menu, repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings.
5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the HOME MENU.
Use this to display the distance from the different
channels to the listening position. See Speaker Distance
on page 59 for more on this.
2c.Speaker Distance
A/V RECEIVER
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
L
C
R
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3.61m
3.69m
3.51m
2.74m
5.77m
5.13m
2.26m
3.54m
Exit
Return
Use this to display the speaker size and number of
speakers. See Speaker Setting on page 57 for more on
this.
2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use / to select
the MCACC preset you want to check.
The distance from the various channels set at the
selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for
channels that are not connected.
1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the MCACC Data
Check menu.
Standing Wave
Speaker Setting
2a.Speaker Setting
A/V RECEIVER
Front
Center
Surr
SB
SW
:
:
:
:
:
LARGE
SMALL
SMALL
SMALL x 2
YES
Use this to display the standing wave related adjustment
values for the various MCACC memories. See Standing
Wave on page 49 for more on this.
1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the MCACC Data
Check menu.
2d.Standing Wave
A/V RECEIVER
Exit
Return
2 Select the channel you want to check.
Use / to select the channel. The corresponding
channel on the layout diagram is highlighted.
[Hz]
SW
63
1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the MCACC Data
Check menu.
2b.Channel Level
[dB]
5.0
[Hz]
[dB]
10 120 5.0
10
[Hz]
201 5.0
[dB]
[dB]
10
+10.0
dB
MCACC
M1.MEMORY1
0
5
10
Exit
Use this to display the level of the various channels. See
Channel Level on page 58 for more on this.
Filter 3
Freq Q ATT Freq Q ATT Freq Q ATT TRIM
16
Channel Level
Filter 2
Filter 1
Filter
Channel
32
63
125
250
500
1k Hz
Return
2 When ‘Filter Channel’ is highlighted, use / to
select the channel for which you want to perform
standing wave control.
The standing wave related calibration value for the
selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset
and its graph are displayed.
A/V RECEIVER
3 Press  to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use / to
select the MCACC preset you want to check.
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
L
C
R
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW
Exit
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
Return
2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use / to select
the MCACC preset you want to check.
The level of the various channels set at the selected
MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for channels
that are not connected.
53
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 54 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
07
The Advanced MCACC menu
Acoustic Cal EQ
Use this to display the calibration values for the
frequency response of the various channels set in the
different MCACC presets. See Acoustic Calibration EQ
Adjust on page 49 for more on this.
1 Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ from the MCACC Data
Check menu.
2e.Acoustic Cal EQ
A/V RECEIVER
dB
Ch :
L
0.0
-8.0 -6.0
0.0
+3.0 +8.5 +8.5 +3.0
63
125
250
500
1k
2k
4k
8k
[Hz]
[Hz]
[Hz]
[Hz]
[Hz]
[Hz]
[Hz]
[Hz]
0.0
0.0
MCACC
M1.MEMORY1
Exit
Data Management
This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets,
allowing you to calibrate your system for different
listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the
same listening position).1 This is useful for alternate
settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to
and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies
from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).
From this menu you can copy from one preset to another,
name presets for easier identification and clear any ones
you don’t need.
16k TRIM
[Hz]
Return
2 When ‘Ch’ is highlighted, use / to select the
channel.
The calibration value for the frequency response of the
selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset
and its graph are displayed.
1 Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then press
HOME MENU.
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use /
// and ENTER to navigate through the screens
and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and
exit the current menu.
2
Select ‘Data Management’ from the HOME MENU.
3 Press  to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use / to
select the MCACC preset you want to check.
HOME MENU
3.Data Management
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
1. Advanced MCACC
2. MCACC Data Check
3. Data Management
4. System Setup
Group Delay
a. Memory Rename
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Clear
Use this to display the calibrated group delay results. See
Using Phase Control on page 11 for more on this.
1 Select ‘Group Delay’ from the MCACC Data Check
menu.
2f.Group Delay
A/V RECEIVER
Channel
:
Calibration :
Front
Center
Surr
SB
Front
After
ms
2.0
1.4
0.8
0.2
-0.4
-1.0
200
Exit
2k
20k Hz
Return
2 When ‘Channel’ is highlighted, use / to select
the channel you want to check.
The result of group delay calibration for the selected
channel is displayed.
Exit
3
Return
Exit
Return
Select the setting you want to adjust.
• Memory Rename – Name your MCACC presets for
easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets on
page 55).
• MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from one
MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC
preset data on page 55).
• MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC presets
that you don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets on
page 55).
When measurements have been performed with Full
Auto MCACC selected at Advanced MCACC or with ALL
or FULL BAND PHASE CTRL selected when Auto
MCACC is selected, the graph before group delay
calibration is also displayed.
No Data is displayed if the selected group delay has not
been measured.
Note
1 This can be done in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 9 or Automatic MCACC (Expert)
on page 45, either of which you should have already completed.
54
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 55 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
The Advanced MCACC menu
07
Renaming MCACC presets
If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re
using, you may want to rename them for easier
identification.
1 Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
3.Data Management
A/V RECEIVER
Exit
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets
stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration
settings of that preset.
MCACC Position Rename
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
Return
:
:
:
:
:
:
Completed! shows in the OSD to confirm the MCACC
preset has been copied, then you automatically return to
the Data Management setup menu.
Clearing MCACC presets
3a.Memory Rename
A/V RECEIVER
a. Memory Rename
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Clear
4 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and copy the settings.
When MCACC Memory Copy? is displayed, select YES.
If NO is selected, the memory is not copied.
MEMORY 1
MEMORY 2
MEMORY 3
MEMORY 4
MEMORY 5
MEMORY 6
Exit
Finish
2 Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then
select an appropriate preset name.
Use / to select the preset, then / to select a
preset name.
1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
3.Data Management
3c.MCACC Memory Clear
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
a. Memory Rename
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Clear
Clear
:
M1.MEMORY 1
OK
3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary,
then press RETURN when you’re finished.
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.
Copying MCACC preset data
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration
EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 47), we
recommend copying your current settings1 to an unused
MCACC preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will
give you a reference point from which to start.
1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
3.Data Management
Exit
Return
Exit
Cancel
2 Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re
currently using (this can’t be undone).
3 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and clear the preset.
When MCACC Memory Clear? is displayed, select YES.
If NO is selected, the memory is not cleared.
Completed! shows in the OSD to confirm the MCACC
preset has been cleared, then you automatically return to
the Data Management setup menu.
3b.MCACC Memory Copy
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
a. Memory Rename
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Clear
Copy
:
All Data
From
:
M1.MEMORY 1
To
:
M1.MEMORY 1
OK
Exit
2
Return
Exit
Cancel
Select the setting you want to copy.
• All Data – Copies all the settings of the selected
MCACC preset memory.
• Level & Distance – Copies only the channel level and
speaker distance settings of the selected MCACC
preset memory.
3 Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the
settings ‘From’, then specify where you want to copy
them (‘To’).
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re
currently using (this can’t be undone).
Note
1 The settings made in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 9 or Automatic MCACC (Expert)
on page 45.
55
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 56 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
The System Setup menu
08
Chapter 8:
The System Setup menu
Making receiver settings from the
System Setup menu
The following section describes how to change the
speaker-related settings manually and make various
other settings (input selection, OSD language selection,
etc.).
TV
SOURCE
CH
RCV
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
INPUT
MUTE
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
TUNE +
• Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve connected to
the digital, HDMI and component video inputs (see
The Input Setup menu on page 90).
• OSD Language – The OSD’s display language can
be changed (see Changing the OSD display language
(OSD Language) on page 91).
• Other Setup – Makes customized settings to reflect
how you are using the receiver (see The Other Setup
menu on page 92).
MUTE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TOOLS
TOP MENU
BAND
• Manual SP Setup – Sets the type of connection used
for surround back terminals and the size, number
distance and overall balance of the connected
speakers (see Manual speaker setup below).
MENU
T.EDIT
ST
ST +
ENTER
PTY
SEARCH
Manual speaker setup
RETURN
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
STATUS
TUNE
PHASE CTRL
CH LEVEL
1 Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then press
HOME MENU.1
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use /
// and ENTER to navigate through the screens
and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and
exit the current menu.
• Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME
MENU.
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to
optimize the surround sound performance. You only need
to make these settings once (unless you change the
placement of your current speaker system or add new
speakers).
These settings are designed to customize your system,
but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC &
Full Band Phase Control) on page 9, it isn’t necessary to
make all of these settings.
2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU, then
press ENTER.
Caution
• The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup are
output at high volume.
HOME MENU
A/V RECEIVER
1. Advanced MCACC
2. MCACC Data Check
3. Data Management
4. System Setup
1 Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press ENTER.
See Making receiver settings from The System Setup
menu above if you’re not already at this screen.
4.System Setup
Exit
3
Select the setting you want to adjust.
4a.Manual SP Setup
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
Return
1. Surr Back System
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve
6. THX Audio Setting
a.Manual SP Setup
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Language
d. Other Setup
4.System Setup
A/V RECEIVER
a.Manual SP Setup
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Language
d. Other Setup
Exit
Exit
Return
Exit
Return
Return
Note
1 You can’t use the HOME MENU when either the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input source is selected (in either the main or sub zone) or the
headphones are connected. When you set ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or ZONE 2&3 to ON (page 66), you can’t use the HOME MENU.
56
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 57 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
The System Setup menu
08
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to
adjust these settings in order:
• Surr Back System – Specifies how you are using your
surround back speakers (see Surround back speaker
setting below).
• Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and number of
speakers you’ve connected (see below).
• Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance of your
speaker system (page 58).
• Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance of your
speakers from the listening position (page 59).
• X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your speaker
system for movie soundtracks (page 59).
• THX Audio Setting – Specifies whether you are
using a THX speaker setup (page 59).
3 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.
• ZONE 2 – Select to use the (surround back) B
speaker terminals for an independent system in
another zone (see MULTI-ZONE listening on page 64).
3 When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed, select Yes.
If No is selected, the setting is not changed.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Speaker Setting
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration
(size, number of speakers and crossover frequency). It is
a good idea to make sure that the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC &
Full Band Phase Control) on page 9 are correct.1 Note that
this setting applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be
set independently.
1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
4a.Manual SP Setup
4a2.Speaker Setting
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
1. Surr Back System
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve
6. THX Audio Setting
Surround back speaker setting
• Default setting: Normal
Front
Center
Surr
SB
SW
:
:
:
:
:
X.OVER :
There are several ways you can use the surround back
speaker channels with this system. In addition to a
normal home theater setup where they are used for the
surround back speakers, they can be used for bi-amping
the front speakers or as an independent speaker system
in another room.
1 Select ‘Surr Back System’ from the Manual SP
Setup menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
on page 56 if you’re not already at this screen.
4a.Manual SP Setup
4a1.Surr Back System
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
1. Surr Back System
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve
6. THX Audio Setting
Normal
Front
Center
Surr
SB
:
:
:
:
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
OK
Exit
2
Return
Exit
Return
Select the surround back speaker setting.
• Normal – Select for normal home theater use with
surround back speakers in your main (speaker
system A) setup.
• Speaker B – Select to use the (surround back) B
speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in
another room (see Speaker B setup on page 61).
Exit
Return
Exit
LARGE
SMALL
SMALL
SMALL x 2
YES
80Hz
Return
2 Choose the set of speakers that you want to set,
then select a speaker size.
Use / to select the size (and number) of each of the
following speakers:2
• Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers
reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you
didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select SMALL to send
the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.
• Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center
speaker, choose NO (the center channel is sent to
the front speakers).
• Surr – Select LARGE if your surround speakers
reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect
surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the
surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a
subwoofer).
• Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re biamping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your
speakers on page 62).
Note
1 If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to SMALL.
2 If you select SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center and surround speakers can’t be
set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.
57
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 58 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
08
The System Setup menu
• SB – Select the number of surround back speakers
you have (one, two or none).1 Select LARGE if your
surround back speakers reproduce bass frequencies
effectively. Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to
the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t
connect surround back speakers choose NO.
• SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of channels
set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when
YES is selected. Choose the PLUS setting if you want
the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or
you want deeper bass (the bass frequencies that
would normally come out the front and center
speakers are also routed to the subwoofer).2 If you did
not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass
frequencies are output from other speakers).
3 Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.3
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
4a.Manual SP Setup
4a3.Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
MCACC :
1. Surr Back System
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve
6. THX Audio Setting
Test Tone
Exit
2
Return
M1.MEMORY 1
:
AUTO
Exit
Return
Select a setup option.
• MANUAL – Move the test tone manually from
speaker to speaker and adjust individual channel
levels.
• AUTO – Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves
from speaker to speaker automatically.
3 Confirm your selected setup option.
The test tones will start after you press ENTER.
4a3.Channel Level
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
A/V RECEIVER
CAUTION
Loud test tones will be output.
Channel Level
Please wait...**
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the
overall balance of your speaker system, an important
factor when setting up a home theater system.
Important
• When Channel Level is selected while MCACC is set
to OFF, the selection screen for the MCACC memory
appears. Select a memory to adjust manually.
Exit
Cancel
4 Adjust the level of each channel using /.
If you selected MANUAL, use / to switch speakers.
The AUTO setup will output test tones in the order shown
on-screen:
4a3.Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
4a3.Channel Level
L
C
R
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW
A/V RECEIVER
Select MCACC memory.
MCACC OFF
M1.MEMORY 1
Exit
Exit
Cancel
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.00 dB
0.00 dB
0.00 dB
0.00 dB
0.00 dB
0.00 dB
0.00 dB
0.00 dB
Finish
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is
emitted.4
Note
1 • If you selected Speaker B, ZONE 2 or Front Bi-Amp (in Surround back speaker setting on page 57) you can’t adjust the surround back
settings.
• If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.
• If you select one surround back speaker only, make sure that speaker is hooked up to the left surround back terminal.
2 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer. This
may not, however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in
the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good
results, listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears
judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems, the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL
for the front speakers.
3 • This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, and bass sounds
playing back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.
• If you’re using a THX speaker setup, confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.
4 • If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker
to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).
• The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual soundtrack.
58
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 59 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
The System Setup menu
08
X-Curve
5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Tip
• The channel level can be changed at any time. Set the
operation selector switch to RCV, then press CH
LEVEL on the remote control, and then use / to
adjust the level.
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright
when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting
acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater
listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie
soundtracks.1
1
Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
4a.Manual SP Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Speaker Distance
1. Surr Back System
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve
6. THX Audio Setting
For good sound depth and separation from your system,
you need to specify the distance of your speakers from
the listening position. The receiver can then add the
proper delay needed for effective surround sound.
Important
• When Speaker Distance is selected while MCACC is
set to OFF, the selection screen for the MCACC
memory appears. Select a memory to adjust
manually.
4a4.Speaker Distance
Exit
2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want.
Use / to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed
as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at
2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope
increases (to a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the
following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your
room size:
A/V RECEIVER
Room size (m2)
≤36
≤48
≤60
≤72
≤300
≤1000
X-Curve (dB/oct)
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
–2.0
–2.5
–3.0
Select MCACC memory.
MCACC OFF
M1.MEMORY 1
Return
• If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be flat and
the X-Curve has no effect.
Exit
Cancel
3
1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP
Setup menu.
4a.Manual SP Setup
4a4.Speaker Distance
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
1. Surr Back System
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve
6. THX Audio Setting
Exit
Return
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3.61m
3.69m
3.67m
2.74m
5.77m
5.13m
2.26m
3.54m
Exit
THX Audio Setting
When the THX Loudness Plus function is used, sound
can be played with the full surround effect even when the
volume is low.
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
L
C
R
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
Finish
2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using /.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 0.01 m
increments.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Tip
• For best surround sound, make sure the surround
back speakers are the same distance from the
listening position.
For the most effective results when using the THX Ultra2/
Select22 Cinema, THX Ultra2/Select22 Music Mode and
THX Ultra2/Select22 Games Mode listening modes (see
Using the Home THX modes on page 36) with the
Advanced Speaker Array (ASA) system (see About THX on
page 122), it is required that you make the setting. See
Placing the speakers on page 26 for more on THX speaker
placement.3
With some speaker setups, depending on the position of
the subwoofer and the walls in your listening area, you
may experience overly resonant frequencies in the bass.
If you have this problem use the THX Ultra2/Select22
subwoofer setup to switch on BGC (boundary gain
compensation) (see About THX on page 122 for more on
this).4
Note
1 Since the principal is the same, X-Curve isn’t applied when you’re using any of the Home THX modes (see Using the Home THX modes on
page 36).
2 Ultra2 for the SC-LX81, Select2 for the SC-LX71.
3 If you don’t have surround back speakers, or just have one, you won’t be able to select this setting.
4 • THX Ultra2/Select2 SW can only be selected when SW at Speaker Setting is set to YES or PLUS.
• The BGC setting can only be selected when THX Ultra2/Select2 SW is set to YES.
59
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 60 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
08
The System Setup menu
1 Select ‘THX Audio Setting’ from the Manual SP
setup menu.
5 Select either ON or OFF for Boundary Gain
Compensation setting.
4a.Manual SP Setup
4a6.THX Audio Setting
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
Loudness Plus
SB SP Position
THX Ultra2 SW
BGC
1. Surr Back System
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve
6. THX Audio Setting
Exit
Return
2 Select either ON or OFF for THX Loudness Plus
setting.
4a6.THX Audio Setting
A/V RECEIVER
Loudness Plus
SB SP Position
THX Ultra2 SW
BGC
:
:
:
:
ON
1.2 m<
YES
OFF
Exit
Finish
3 Specify the distance of your surround back speakers
from each other.
4a6.THX Audio Setting
A/V RECEIVER
Loudness Plus
SB SP Position
THX Ultra2 SW
BGC
:
:
:
:
ON
1.2 m<
YES
OFF
Exit
Finish
• 0–0.3 m – Surround speakers within 30 cm apart.
• >0.3– 1.2 m – Surround speakers between 30 cm and
1.2 m apart.
• 1.2 m< – Surround speakers more than 1.2 m apart
(default).
4 Specify whether your subwoofer is THX Ultra2/
Select21 certified or not.
4a6.THX Audio Setting
A/V RECEIVER
Loudness Plus
SB SP Position
THX Ultra2 SW
BGC
Exit
:
:
:
:
ON
1.2 m<
YES
OFF
Finish
If your subwoofer isn’t THX Ultra2/Select21 certified, but
you still want to switch boundary gain compensation on,
select YES here, but the effect might not work properly.
Note
1 Ultra2 for the SC-LX81, Select2 for the SC-LX71.
60
En
Exit
:
:
:
:
ON
1.2 m<
YES
OFF
Finish
6 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
SCLX81_71.book Page 61 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Other connections
09
Chapter 9:
Other connections
Caution
• Before making or changing the connections, switch
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.
Connecting the multichannel analog
inputs
For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may
have 5.1, 6.1 or 7.1 channel analog outputs (depending
on whether your player supports surround back
channels). Make sure that the player is set to output
multichannel analog audio.
1 Connect the front, surround, center and subwoofer
outputs on your DVD player to the corresponding
MULTI CH IN jack on this receiver.
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the
connections.
2 If your DVD player also has outputs for surround
back channels, connect these to the corresponding
MULTI CH IN jacks on this receiver.
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the
connections.
• If there is a single surround back output, connect it to
the SURROUND BACK L jack on this receiver.
• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround
speakers for the surround channel, not the surround
back channel.
2 Use INPUT SELECT to select MULTI CH IN.
You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front
panel.
• Depending on the DVD player you’re using, the
analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be
too low. In this case, the output level of the subwoofer
can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup
in Other Setup. For details, see Multi Channel Input
Setup on page 92.
Speaker B setup
Caution
• Be careful not to allow any contact between speaker
wires from different terminals.
• You can use speakers with a nominal impedance
between 6 Ω to 16 Ω.
After selecting Speaker B in Surround back speaker
setting on page 57, you can use the speakers connected
to the (surround back) B speaker terminals on the rear
panel to listen to stereo playback in another room. See
Switching the speaker system below for the listening
options with this setup.
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back
speaker terminals on the rear panel.
Connect them the same way you connected your
speakers in Installing your speaker system on page 25.
Make sure to review Placing the speakers on page 26
when placing the speakers in another room.
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs
If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as
above, you must select the analog multichannel inputs
for surround sound playback.1
INPUT SELECT
HDMI
TUNER
TV
SOURCE
SPEAKERS
R SURROUND BACK/
B
L (Single)
R
SURROUND
L
A
FRONT
R
L
CENTER
SELECTABLE
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
L
R
RCV
1 Make sure you have set the playback source to the
proper output setting.
For example, you might need to set your DVD player to
output multichannel analog audio.
2 Select ‘Speaker B’ from the Surr Back System
menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 57 to do this.
Note
1 • When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.
• You can’t listen to your speaker B system during playback from the multichannel inputs.
• With MULTI CH IN inputs, it is possible to play pictures simultaneously. For details, see Multi Channel Input Setup on page 92.
61
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 62 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
09
Other connections
Switching the speaker system
If you selected Speaker B in Surround back speaker
setting on page 57, three speaker system settings are
possible using SPEAKERS. If you selected Normal or
Front Bi-Amp, the button will simply switch your main
speaker system on or off. The options below are for the
Speaker B setting only.1
• Use SPEAKERS on the front panel to select a
speaker system setting.
As mentioned above, if you have selected Normal, the
button will simply switch your main speaker system (A)
on or off.
AUDIO
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
VIDEO
TUNER EDIT
AUTO SURR/ HOME
BAND STREAM DIRECT THX
STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO/
SURROUND SURROUND
A.L.C.
(ST)
ENTER
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
iPod DIRECT
USB
RETURN
DIGITAL IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
MCACC
SETUP MIC
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver
and low frequency driver of your speakers to different
amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your
speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate
terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement
will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.
1 Connect your speakers as shown next page.
This illustration below shows the connections for biamping your front left speaker. Hook up your bi-amp
compatible speakers for other channels in the same way.
SPEAKERS
SELECTABLE
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
R SURROUND BACK/
B
L (Single)
R
SURROUND
L
A
R
FRONT
L
CENTER
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
(ST)
(TUNE)
HOME MENU
CONTROL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
VIDEO3 INPUT
Bi-amping your speakers
PHONES
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker system option:
• SPA – Sound is output from speaker system A and
the same signal is output from the pre-out terminals.
• SPB – Sound is output from the two speakers
connected to speaker system B. Multichannel
sources will not be heard. The same signal is output
from the surround back channel pre-out terminals.
• SPAB – Sound is output from speaker system A (up
to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two
speakers in speaker system B, and the subwoofer.
The sound from speaker system B will be the same as
the sound from speaker system A (multichannel
sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).
• SP (off) – No sound is output from the speakers. The
same sound is output from the pre-out terminals
(including from your subwoofer, if connected) as
when selecting speaker system A (above).
Bi-amp
compatible
speaker
High
Low
• Make sure that the + / – connections are properly
inserted.
2 Select the ‘Front Bi-Amp’ setting from the ‘Surr
Back System’ menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 57 to specify
how you’re using the surround back speaker terminals.
Caution
• Most speakers with both High and Low terminals
have two metal plates that connect the High to the
Low terminals. These must be removed when you are
bi-amping the speakers or you could severely
damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for
more information.
• If your speakers have a removable crossover network,
make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing
so may damage your speakers.
Note
1 • The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 56. However, if SPB is selected above, no sound
is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).
• Depending on the settings in Surround back speaker setting on page 57 output from the surround back pre-out terminals may change.
• All speaker systems (except Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.
62
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 63 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Other connections
09
Bi-wiring your speakers
Connecting additional amplifiers
The reasons for bi-wiring are basically the same as biamping, but additionally, interference effects within the
wire could be reduced, producing better sound. Again, to
do this your speakers must be bi-wireable (that is they
must have separate terminals for the high and low
frequencies). When bi-wiring, make sure you’ve selected
Normal or Speaker B in Surround back speaker setting on
page 57.
This receiver has more than enough power for any home
use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every
channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the
connections shown below to add amplifiers to power
your speakers.
ANALOG
INPUT
L
R
SC-LX81
Front channel
amplifier
• To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to
the speaker terminal on the receiver.
ANALOG
INPUT
M LOOP
Center channel
amplifier (mono)
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
L
PRE OUT
R
ANALOG
INPUT
SUBWOOFER
VR2
IN
MULTI CH IN
L
R
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
Surround back
channel amplifier
L
R
SUBWOOFER
A R
FRONT
ANALOG
L
INPUT
CENTER
L
R
Surround channel
amplifier
Caution
• Make sure you use a parallel (not series, which are
fairly uncommon) connection when bi-wiring your
speakers.
• Don’t connect different speakers from the same
terminal in this way.
ANALOG
INPUT
Powered
subwoofer
• You can use the additional amplifier on the surround
back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In
this case plug the amplifier into the left (L (Single))
terminal only.
• The sound from the surround back terminals will
depend on how you have configured the Surround
back speaker setting on page 57.
• To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the
speaker system to OFF, or simply disconnect any
speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.
• If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front
speaker setting (see Speaker Setting on page 57) to
LARGE.
63
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 64 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
09
Other connections
MULTI-ZONE listening
This receiver can power up to three independent systems in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTIZONE connections. An example MULTI-ZONE setup is shown below, but the number of MULTI-ZONE connections (and
the way you choose to connect them) depends on how you want to set up your system.
Sub zone (ZONE 3)
Sub zone (ZONE 2)
Main zone
(
)
IN
LAN (10/100)
1-3
V
CONTROL12
TRIGGER
XM
IN 4
(CD-R)
OUT
IN
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD)
ASSIGNABLE
HDMI
ZONE3/
BD
SOURCE
IN
OUT
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
IN 1
1
IN 2
(DVD)
PR
PB
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
R
PR
PR
PB
L
IN 2 (CD)
Y
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
AC IN
PB
ANTENNA
Y
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
ZONE 3
OUT
FM UNBAL 75
PR
PB
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
S-VIDEO
R
ZONE 2
OUT
IR
IN 3 (DVR2)
IN
PR
AM LOOP
PB
L
Y
FRONTMONITO
CENTER
OUT
VIDEO
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
L
PRE OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
R
SUBWOOFER
1
SOURCE
OUT
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
RS-232C
OPTICAL
IN
IN 2
(DVR1)
2
IN
1
IN
2
PHONO
IN
SIGNAL
GND
CD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
DVD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO1
IN
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
3
IN 4
(CD-R)
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
DVR1
OUT
PHONO
IN
R
IN
DVR2
IN
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
OUT
ZONE
3
OUT
IN
MULTI CH IN
FRONT
VIDEO
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
L
CD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
SURROUND
L
R
SUBWOOFER
CONTROL
IN
VIDEO2
IN
L
OUT
DIGITAL
OUT
1
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
(VIDEO2)
2
SPEAKERS
SELECTABLE
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
R SURROUND BACK/
B
L (Single)
R
A R
FRONT
L
CENTER
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
ZONE3/
SOURCE
OUT
(HDMI
CTRL)
OUT
2
SOURCE
OUT
RS-232C
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO IN
DIGITAL IN
AUDIO IN
Different sources can be playing in three zones at the
same time or, depending on your needs, the same source
can also be used. The main and sub zones have
independent power (the main zone power can be off
while one (or both) of the sub zones is on) and the sub
zones can be controlled by the remote or front panel
controls. However, you may need to specify the volume
settings in ZONE Audio Setup on page 93.
MULTI-ZONE listening options
The following table shows the signals that can be output
to ZONE 2 and ZONE 3:
Sub Zone
Input sources available
ZONE2
Analog audio signals (AUDIO ZONE2 OUT).a
With video signals,b the composite video
(VIDEO ZONE2 OUT) and component video
(COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE2 OUT)c signals
can be outputd but the S-Video signal cannot
be output.
Making MULTI-ZONE connections
It is possible to make these connections if you have a
separate TV and speakers for your primary (ZONE 2) sub
zone, and a separate amplifier1 (and speakers) for your
secondary (ZONE 3) sub zone. You will also need a
separate amplifier if you are not using the MULTI-ZONE
setup using speaker terminals (Zone 2) on page 65 for
your primary sub zone. There are two primary sub zone
setups possible with this system. Choose whichever
works best for you.
ZONE3
Analog audio signals (AUDIO ZONE3 OUT)a
and digital audio signal (OPTICAL ZONE3/
SOURCE OUT).e
a.Any analog signal. (This does not apply for the MULTI CH IN and
PHONO inputs.)
b.JPEG files cannot be played with the input set to HOME MEDIA
GALLERY.
c.The COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE2 OUT jack is only provided on the
SC-LX81.
d.SC-LX81 only: The video convert function does not work for ZONE 2.
Connect the composite video and component video to the same
types of jacks for the inputs and outputs.
e.HOME MEDIA GALLERY cannot be selected for ZONE 3.
Note
1 You can’t use sound controls (such as the tone controls or Midnight listening) or any surround modes with a separate amplifier in the sub
zone. You can, however, use the features available with your sub zone amplifier.
64
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 65 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Other connections
09
Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (Zone 2)
• Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE2
OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE2 OUT1
jacks, both on the rear of this receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub
zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.
Sub zone
Main zone
12 V
TRIGGER
LAN (10/100)
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD)
HDMI
BD
IN
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
IN 1
1
IN 2
(VIDEO1)
PR
AC IN
PB
(VIDEO1)
ANTENNA
Y
(VIDEO2)
2
PR
PB
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
R
PR
PB
L
IN 2 (CD)
IN 3 (DVR2)
IN 3
(DVD)
(DVD)
VIDEO
Y
MONITOR
OUT
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
PR
PB
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
S-VIDEO
R
L
ZONE 2
OUT
IR
ZONE 3
OUT
IN
FM UNBAL 75
AM LOOP
PR
PB
Y
FRONTMONITO
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
OUT
L
VIDEO
PRE OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
R
SUBWOOFER
1
IN
1
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
2
SIGNAL
GND
IN
2
IN 2
(DVR1)
IN
PHONO
IN
CD
IN
DVD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO1
IN
3
IN 4
(CD-R)
IN
DVR2
IN
OUT
ZONE
3
OUT
IN
MULTI CH IN
FRONT
VIDEO
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
L
CD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
SURROUND
L
R
SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
OUT
SELECTABLE
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3 ASSIGNABLE
R SURROUND BACK/
B
L (Single)
R
A R
FRONT
L
CENTER
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
ZONE3/
SOURCE
OUT
OUT
1
OUT
PHONO
IN
R
CONTROL
IN
DVR1
L
OUT
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
VIDEO2
IN
(HDMI
CTRL)
SOURCE
OUT
OUT
2
RS-232C
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO IN
MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (Zone 2)
You must select ZONE 2 in Surround back speaker setting
on page 57 to use this setup. Note that the sound in the
sub zone will be temporarily interrupted when controlling
the main zone (for example, changing the input source or
starting playback).
Sub zone
• Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE2 OUT1
jacks on the rear of this receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the
surround back speaker terminals as shown below.
Main zone
12 V
TRIGGER
LAN (10/100)
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD)
HDMI
BD
IN
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
IN 1
1
IN 2
(VIDEO1)
2
PR
PB
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
R
PR
PB
L
VIDEO
ZONE 2
OUT
IR
ZONE 3
OUT
IN
AC IN
(VIDEO1)
PB
Y
ANTENNA
Y
MONITOR
OUT
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
FM UNBAL 75
P
R
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
ZONE 2 OUT
R
L
AM LOOP
PR
PB
Y
MONITO
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
OUT
L
VIDEO
PRE OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
R
SUBWOOFER
1
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
KERS
IN
1
R SURROUNDINBACK/
IN 2
(DVR1)
IN
2
2
PHONO
IN
CD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
DVD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
3
IN
IN 4
(CD-R)
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
VIDEO2
IN
DVR1
OUT
PHONO
IN
R
DVR2
IN
OUT
ZONE 3
OUT
CD
IN
MULTI CH IN
IN
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
VIDEO
L
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
R
SUBWOOFER
CONTROL
IN
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
VIDEO1
IN
BSIGNAL
GNDL (Single)
L
OUT
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
OUT
1
PR
(VIDEO2)
IN 2 (CD)
IN 3 (DVR2)
IN 3
(DVD)
(DVD)
SPEAKERS
SELECTABLE
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
R SURROUND BACK/
B
L (Single)
R
SURROUND
L
A
R
FRONT
L
CENTER
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
ZONE3/
SOURCE
OUT
(HDMI
CTRL)
OUT
2
SOURCE
OUT
RS-232C
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
Note
1 SC-LX81 only: ZONE2 COMPONENT OUT can be used to output clear images.
65
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 66 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
09
Other connections
Secondary MULTI-ZONE setup (Zone 3)
• Connect a separate amplifier to the ZONE3/
SOURCE OUT digital output on the rear of this receiver.
The amplifier must have an optical digital input to make
this connection. This will allow you to hear the digital
output of a component in a second sub zone.
Sub zone (ZONE 3)
Main zone
(
)
IN
LAN (10/100)
1-3
V
CONTROL12
TRIGGER
OUT
IN 4
(CD-R)
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD)
HDMI
ZONE3/
BD
SOURCE
IN
OUT
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
IN 1
1
IN 2
(DVD)
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
2
PR
PB
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
R
PR
PB
L
IN 2 (CD)
VIDEO
Y
MONITOR
OUT
AC IN
PBZONEY2
OUT ANTENNA
R
L
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
PR
(VIDEO2)
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
FM UNBAL 75
AM LOOP
ZONE 2
OUT
S-VIDEO
MONITO
OUT
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
L
ZONE 2
OUT
PRE OUT
IR
IN 3 (DVR2)
ZONE 3
OUT
IN
1
SOURCE
OUT
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
OPTICAL
IN
IN 2
(DVR1)
RS-232C
2
IN
1
IN
2
PHONO
IN
SIGNAL
GND
CD
IN
ZONE 3
OUT
VIDEO
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
DVD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
L
VIDEO1
IN
PHONO
IN
VIDEO2
IN
VIDEO
CD
IN
OUT
R
SUBWOOFER
DVR1
DVR2
IN
OUT
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
IN
MULTI CH IN
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
L
OUT
DIGITAL
R
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
R
IN
SUBWOOFER
CONTROL
IN
3
SPEAKERS
OUT
IN 4
(CD-R)
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
SELECTABLE
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
ASSIGNABLE
R SURROUND BACK/
B
L (Single)
R
SURROUND
L
A R
FRONT
L
CENTER
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
ZONE3/
SOURCE
OUT
OUT
1
(HDMI
CTRL)
SOURCE
OUT
OUT
2
RS-232C
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
DIGITAL IN
AUDIO IN
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls
The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust
the sub zone volume and select sources. See MULTIZONE remote controls on page 67.
AUDIO
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
VIDEO
TUNER EDIT
AUTO SURR/ HOME
BAND STREAM DIRECT THX
STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO/
SURROUND SURROUND
A.L.C.
(ST)
ENTER
ON/OFF
• ZONE 2 ON – Selects your primary (ZONE 2) sub
zone
SPEAKERS
• ZONE 2&3 ON – Select both sub zones
(ST)
iPod DIRECT
USB
(TUNE)
HOME MENU
CONTROL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
VIDEO3 INPUT
1 Press MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE ON/OFF on the front
panel.
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:
RETURN
DIGITAL IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
MCACC
SETUP MIC
L AUDIO R
• ZONE 3 ON – Selects your secondary (ZONE 3) sub
zone
PHONES
SC-LX81
• MULTI-ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-ZONE
feature off
The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE
control has been switched ON.
INPUT
SELECTOR
MASTER
VOLUME
PHASE
CONTROL
 STANDBY/ON
ADVANCED
MCACC
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER
HDMI
2 Press CONTROL to select the sub zone(s) you want.
If you selected ZONE 2&3 ON above, you can toggle
between ZONE 2 and ZONE 3.
• When the receiver is on,1 make sure that any
operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE and
your selected sub zone(s) show in the display. If this
is not showing, the front panel controls affect the
main zone only.
Note
1 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) continue to show in the display.
66
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 67 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Other connections
3 Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source
for the zone you have selected.
For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source connected
to the CD-R inputs to the primary (ZONE 2) sub room.
• If you select TUNER, you can use the TUNER controls
to select a preset station (see Saving station presets
on page 41 if you’re unsure how to do this).1
4 Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the
volume.
This is only possible if you selected the VARIABLE
volume control in ZONE Audio Setup on page 93.2
5 When you’re finished, press CONTROL again to
return to the main zone controls.
You can also press MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE ON/OFF on
the front panel to switch off all output to the sub zone(s).3
MULTI-ZONE remote controls
09
Connecting an IR receiver
If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or
shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote
control in another zone, you can use an optional IR
receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your
system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of
this receiver.4
1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN 1 jack on
the rear of this receiver.
If you also plan to use a separate IR receiver in the sub
room, connect this to the IR IN 2 jack.
Closet or shelving unit
IN
Set the MULTI-ZONE operation switch to ZONE 2 or
ZONE 3 to operate the corresponding zone.
The following table shows the possible MULTI-ZONE
remote controls:
Non-Pioneer
component
IR
Pioneer
component
CONTROL
IN
OUT
12 V
TRIGGER
LAN (10/100)
Button

COAXIAL
What it does
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD)
HDMI
BD
IN
Switches on/off power in the currently selected
sub zone.
IN 3 (DVR2)
Use to select the input source directly (this may
not work for some functions) in the currently
selected sub zone.
VOL +/–
Use to set the listening volume in the currently
selected sub zone.
IN
(DVD)
2
PR
(VIDEO1)
PB
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
R
1
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
IN 2
(DVR1)
IN
ZONE 2
OUT
IR
ZONE 3
OUT
L
CD
IN
CD-R
OUT
IN
1
IN
2
R
IN
SIGNAL
GND
L
OUT
CONTROL
IN
3
IN 4
(CD-R)
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
OUT
R
ASSIGNABLE
IN
ZONE3/
SOURCE
OUT
(HDMI
CTRL)
OUT
2
PHONO
IN
SIGNAL
GND
OUT
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
OUT
1
IN
1
IN
2
IR
PR
L
IN
Use to select the input source in the currently
selected sub zone.
Input
source
buttons
IN 1
1
IN 2 (CD)
2
INPUT
SELECT
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
CONTROL
SOURCE
OUT
RS-232C
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
IR receiver
2 Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the
IR OUT jack on the rear of this receiver to link it to the
IR receiver.
Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for
the type of cable necessary for the connection.
• If you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR
receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components
with this unit’s sensor on page 106 to connect to the
CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack.
Note
1 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other
zone. Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.
2 The volume levels of the main and sub zones are independent.
3 • You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.
• If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for awhile, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in
standby.
4 • Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.
• Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR
compatibility.
• If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.
67
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 68 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
09
Other connections
Switching components on and off using
the 12 volt trigger
Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat
screen TV
You can connect components in your system (such as a
screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch on
or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input
function. However, you must specify which input
functions switch on the trigger using the The Input Setup
menu on page 90. Note that this will only work with
components that have a standby mode.1
If you have a Pioneer flat screen TV, you can use an SR+
cable2 to connect it to this unit and take advantage of
various convenient features, such as automatic video
input switching of the flat screen TV when the input is
changed.3
CONTROL
12V
TRIGGER
OUT
Pioneer flat screen TV
12 V
TRIGGER
LAN (10/100)
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD)
HDMI
BD
IN
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
IN 2 (CD)
IN 3 (DVR2)
IN 1
1
IN
(DVD)
(VIDEO1)
2
PB
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
R
PR
ASSIGNABLE
P
IN 1 (DVD)
L
HDMI
ZONE 2
OUT
IR
12 V
TRIGGER
LAN (10/100)
COAXIAL
PR
ZONE 3
OUT
BD
IN
IN 3 (DVR2)
• The trigger maximum power is DC OUT 12 V/50 mA.
(DVD)
2
PR
(VI
PB
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
R
PR
L
Z
IR
Z
IN
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
IN 2
(DVR1)
IN
2
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
IN
2
PHONO
IN
SIGNAL
GND
CD
IN
L
R
IN
CONTROL
IN
3
OUT
1
IN
1
OUT
IN 4
(CD-R)
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch
on the trigger, you’ll be able to switch the component on
or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set on
page 90.
IN 1
1
IN 2 (CD)
1
• Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to
the 12 V trigger of another component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the
connection.
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE3/
SOURCE
OUT
(HDMI
CTRL)
OUT
2
SOURCE
OUT
RS-232C
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
Important
• You can’t use the SR+ features when HDMI Control
is set to ON. Make sure to set HDMI Control to OFF
when you use the SR+ features (page 88).
• If you connect to a Pioneer flat screen TV using an
SR+ cable, you will need to point the remote control
at the flat screen TV remote sensor to control the
receiver. In this case, you won’t be able to control the
receiver using the remote control if you switch the flat
screen TV off.
• Before you can use the extra SR+ features, you need
to make a few settings in the receiver. See The Input
Setup menu on page 90 and SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat
screen TVs on page 93 for detailed instructions.
Note
1 Triggered connections with up to two devices compatible with 12-volt triggers can be made with this receiver.
2 The 3-ringed SR+ cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095. Contact the Pioneer Customer Support
division for more information on obtaining an SR+ cable (you can also use a commercially available 3-ringed mini phone plug for the
connection).
3 This receiver is compatible with all SR+ equipped Pioneer flat screen TVs from 2003 onward.
68
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 69 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Other connections
09
• Use a 3-ringed miniplug SR+ cable to connect the
CONTROL IN jack of this receiver with the CONTROL
OUT jack of your flat screen TV.
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer flat
screen TV
When connected using an SR+ cable, a number of
features become available to make using this receiver
with your Pioneer flat screen TV even easier. These
features include:
VIDEO
INPUT 1
Pioneer flat screen TV
VIDEO
INPUT 2
• On-screen displays when making receiver settings,
such as speaker setup, MCACC setup, and so on.
• On-screen volume display.
• On-screen display of listening mode.
• Automatic video input switching on the flat screen
TV.
DVD player
Satellite receiver, etc.
DVD
AUDIO IN
TV/SAT
AUDIO IN
SC-LX81
INPUT
SELECTOR
• Automatic volume muting on the flat screen TV.
See also SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat screen TVs on page 93
for more on setting up the receiver.
Important
• The SR+ features do not work when any of the HOME
MEDIA GALLERY function is selected.
MASTER
VOLUME
BD MENU
PHASE
CONTROL
ADVANCED
MCACC
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER
HDMI
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
DIMMER
AUDIO
 STANDBY/ON
TV
SOURCE
RCV
SR+
SBch
MCACC
DISP
This receiver
To make the most of the SR+ features, you should
connect your source components (DVD player, etc.) in a
slightly different way to that described in this chapter. For
each component, connect the video output directly to the
flat screen TV, and just connect the audio (analog and/or
digital) to this receiver.
CH
VOL
A.ATT
GENRE HDMI OUT
VOL
D.ACCESS
CLASS
CH
ENTER
1 Make sure that the flat screen TV and this receiver
are switched on and that they are connected with the
SR+ cable.
See Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat screen TV on
page 68 for more on connecting these components.
• Make sure you have also selected the display input to
which you’ve connected the receiver in The Input
Setup menu on page 90.
2 To switch SR+ mode on/off, set the operation
selector switch to RCV, then press SR+.
The front panel display shows SR+ ON or SR+ OFF.
• The automatic video input switching and the
automatic volume muting features are enabled
separately; see SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat screen TVs
on page 93.
69
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 70 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
09
Other connections
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC
output
When using the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
(see page 50) to calibrate the reverb characteristics of
your listening room, you can graphically check the
results on your computer connected to this receiver.
Also, when the Full Band Phase Control function is
activated, you can visually check the calibrated
characteristics of group delay of the speakers and the
corrected characteristics of group delay processed by the
exclusive correction filter by installing the corresponding
PC application on your computer.
Use a commercially-available RS-232C cable to connect
the RS-232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C
jack on the back panel of this receiver (the cable must be
cross type, female–female).
The software to output the results is available from the
support area of the Pioneer website (http://
www.pioneer.eu). Instructions for using the software are
also available here. If you have any questions about the
software, please contact the Pioneer Service Center
specified on your warranty card.
Please make sure your system meets the following
requirements:
• Operating system must be Microsoft Windows® XP
(Service Pack 2) or Windows® 2000.
• CPU must be at least Pentium 3 / 300 MHz or AMD
K6 / 300 MHz (or equivalent) with at least 128 MB of
memory, and your monitor must be able to display a
minimum resolution of 800x600.
• An RS-232C port connector is necessary for graphical
output. Refer to the operating instructions and/or the
PC manufacturer for more information on making
the proper port settings.
• Connect your computer to the RS-232C jack on the
rear panel of the receiver.
Make sure that the receiver and all connected
components are switched off and disconnected from the
power outlet when you do this.1
Use a commercially-available cable to connect the RS232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack on
this receiver. See the documentation provided with the
Advanced MCACC application for more information.
RS-232C
Personal computer
Advanced MCACC output using your PC
Before continuing, make sure you have completed step 2
in Checking MCACC Data on page 52. Note that
transmission data is erased when the receiver is turned
off.
1 Select ‘Output PC’ from MCACC Data Check menu
and press ENTER.
When the receiver is ready for transmission, Start the
MCACC application on your PC shows on the OSD.
2.MCACC Data Check
2g.Output PC
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
a. Speaker Setting
b. Channel Level
c. Speaker Distance
d. Standing Wave
e. Acoustic Cal EQ
f. Group Delay
g. Output PC
Start the MCACC application on your PC.
• System must have internet access.
Exit
Return
Exit
Cancel
2 Start the MCACC application on your computer.
Follow the instructions provided with the application. It
will take about ten seconds for the transmission to
complete, then you will be able to analyze the output on
your computer. Since the data will be cleared from the
receiver when you restart reverb measurement or turn off
the receiver, you might want to save the information on
your PC after measurement.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the MCACC Data Check menu.
Continue with other operations in the MCACC Data
Check menu if necessary. Press RETURN again to exit
the MCACC Data Check menu.
Note
1 Make sure that you do this before continuing to the Reverb Measurement option in Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 51
(measurement data is cleared if you switch off the power).
70
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 71 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
10
Chapter 10:
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY
inputs
• Playing audio or photo files stored on a USB
memory device or audio files stored on an iPod
Enjoying the Home Media Gallery
This receiver’s Home Media Gallery function allows you
to listen to audio files, play photo files or listen to Internet
radio stations on a computer or other component
connected to the receiver’s LAN terminal. Home Media
Gallery also allows you to play audio or photo files stored
on a USB memory device connected to the receiver’s
USB terminal, or by connecting an iPod to play audio files
stored on the iPod. This chapter describes the
connection, setup, and playback procedures required to
enjoy these features. It is advisory that you also refer to
the operation manual supplied with your network
component.
Features of Home Media Gallery
This receiver is equipped with the LAN terminal and the
USB terminal, and you can enjoy the following features
by connecting your components to these terminals.
• Playback the music or photo files stored in PCs1
The desired audio or photo file can be played directly
by selecting it on the folder/file list displayed on the
screen.
See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 74,
Playing back audio files stored on a USB memory
device on page 77 and Playing back audio files stored
on an iPod on page 76.
See Playing back photo files stored in components
on the network or USB memory device on page 78.
Steps to enjoy the Home Media Gallery
Playing back audio files on the network and
listening to Internet radio stations
1 Connect to the network through LAN interface.
See Connecting to the network through LAN interface on
page 72 for more on this.
2 Configure the network settings.
The setup is necessary only when the router to be
connected does not have the built-in DHCP server
function.
You can playback a lot of musics and photos stored
in your PCs using this unit.
See Setting up the network on page 82 for more on this.
See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 74
and Playing back audio files stored on components on
the network on page 76.
3 Playback with Home Media Gallery.
See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 74 for
more on this.
See Playing back photo files stored in components
on the network or USB memory device on page 78.
• Listening to Internet radio stations
You can select and listen to your favorite Internet
radio station from the list of Internet radio stations
created, edited, and managed by the vTuner
database service exclusively for use with the Pioneer
products. Also, you can listen to Internet radio station
managed by Neural THX.
Playing back audio or photo files stored on a
USB memory device
1 Connect USB memory device to the iPod DIRECT
USB terminal.
See Connecting a USB device on page 73 for more on this.
2 Playback with Home Media Gallery.
See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 74 for
more on this.
See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 74
and Listening to Internet radio stations on page 78
and Listening to Neural Music Direct on page 80.
Note
1 Besides a PC, you can also play back audio or photo files stored on your other components with the built-in media server function based on
DLNA 1.0 framework and protocols (i.e. network-capable hard disks and audio systems).
71
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 72 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
10
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod
1 Connect iPod to the iPod DIRECT USB terminal.
See Connecting an iPod on page 72 for more on this.
2 Playback with Home Media Gallery.
See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 74 for
more on this.
Connecting to the network through
LAN interface
Caution
By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN
terminal, you can play back audio files stored on
components on the network, including your PC, and
listen to Internet radio stations.1
Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to the LAN
terminal on your router (with or without the built-in DHCP
server function) with a straight LAN cable (CAT 5 or
higher).
Turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case
your router does not have the built-in DHCP server
function, it is necessary set up the network manually. For
details, see Setting up the network on page 82.
The specifications of a LAN terminal
• Before making or changing the connections, switch
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.
• Illustration shows the SC-LX81, however connections
for the SC-LX71 are the same except where noted.
12 V
TRIGGER
LAN (10/100)
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD)
HDMI
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
1
Internet
(DVD)
2
LAN terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet jack
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Connecting an iPod
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow
you to control playback of audio content from your iPod
using the controls of this receiver.2
PR
SIRIUS
BD
IN
IN 2 (CD)
IN
AUDIO
IN 3 (DVR2)
IR
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
VIDEO
TUNER EDIT
AUTO SURR/ HOME
BAND STREAM DIRECT THX
STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO/
SURROUND SURROUND
A.L.C.
CONTROL
IN
1
IN 2
(DVR1)
IN
2
SIG
G
IN
2
OUT
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
3
IN 4
(CD-R)
SPEAKERS
(ST)
iPod DIRECT
USB
(TUNE)
HOME MENU
RETURN
DIGITAL IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
MCACC
SETUP MIC
L AUDIO R
PHONES
IN
iPod
Modem
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE3/
SOURCE
OUT
USB cable
(for iPod connection)
(HDMI
CTRL)
OUT
2
ENTER
CONTROL
IN
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
OUT
1
(ST)

IN 1
(TV/SAT)
ON/OFF
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
VIDEO3 INPUT
IN
1
SOURCE
OUT
RS-232C
OPTICAL
MENU
DIGITAL
Router
LAN
3
2
1
WAN
SC-LX81
to LAN port
LAN cable
(sold separately)
to LAN port
PC1
PC2
Note
1 • To listen to Internet radio stations, you must sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service Provider) beforehand.
• Video files cannot be played back.
• With Windows Media Connect or Windows Media Player 11, you can even play back copyrighted audio files on this receiver.
2 • This system is compatible with the audio of iPod nano, iPod fifth generation, iPod classic, iPod touch (not supported iPod shuffle and
iPhone). However, that some of the functions may be restricted for some models. Note, however, compatibility may vary depending on the
software version of your iPod. Please be sure to use the latest available software version.
• iPod is licensed for reproduction of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted to reproduce.
• Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.
• Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of
recorded material resulting from the iPod failure.
• The USB cable (for iPod connection) is not included with this receiver.
72
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 73 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
Connecting a USB device
About network playback
1
It is possible to playback files using the USB interface on
the front of this receiver.
AUDIO
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
VIDEO
TUNER EDIT
AUTO SURR/ HOME
BAND STREAM DIRECT THX
STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO/
SURROUND SURROUND
A.L.C.
ENTER
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
iPod DIRECT
USB
RETURN
DIGITAL IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
MCACC
SETUP MIC
The network playback function of this unit uses the
following technologies:
Windows Media Connect
See Windows Media Player 11/ Windows Media Connect
on page 86 for more on this.
(ST)
(TUNE)
HOME MENU
CONTROL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
VIDEO3 INPUT
(ST)
10
PHONES
Windows Media DRM
USB mass
storage device
Introduction
The Home Media Gallery allows you to play music or
photo on media servers connected on an identical Local
Area Network (LAN) as the receiver. This unit allows for
the playing of files stored on the following:
• PCs running Microsoft Windows XP with Windows
Media Connect installed
• PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP with
Windows Media Player 11 installed
• DLNA-compatible digital media servers (on PCs or
other components)
To play back audio or photo files stored on components
on the network or listen to Internet radio stations, you
must turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In
case your router does not have the built-in DHCP server
function, it is necessary to set up the network manually.
Otherwise, you cannot play back audio files stored on
components on the network or listen to Internet radio
stations. See Setting up the network on page 82 for more
on this.
Microsoft Windows Media Digital Rights Management
(WMDRM) is a platform to protect and securely deliver
content for playback on computers, portable devices and
network devices. Home Media Gallery functions as a
WMDRM 10 for networked devices. WMDRM protected
content can only be played on media servers supporting
WMDRM.
Content owners use WMDRM technology to protect their intellectual
property, including copyrights. This device uses WMDRM software to
access WMDRM protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to
protect the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the
software’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content.
Revocation does not affect unprotected content. When you download
licenses for protected content, you agree that Microsoft may include a
revocation list with the licenses. Content owners may require you to
upgrade WMDRM to access their content. If you decline an upgrade,
you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade.
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of
Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this
product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.
DLNA
DLNA CERTIFIED™ Audio Player
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a crossindustry organization of consumer electronics,
computing industry and mobile device companies.
Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of
digital media through a wired or wireless network in the
home.
The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find
products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability
Guidelines. This unit complies with DLNA Interoperability
Guidelines v1.0.
Note
1 • Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) and digital audio players
(MP3 players) of format FAT16/32. It is not possible to connect this unit to a personal computer for USB playback.
• Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for
any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver.
73
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 74 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
10
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
When a PC running DLNA server software or other DLNA
compatible device is connected to this player, some
setting changes of software or other devices may be
required. Please refer to the operating instructions for
the software or device for more information.
DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of
Digital Living Network Alliance.
Content playable over a network
• Even when encoded in a compatible format, some
files may not play correctly.
• Movie files cannot be played back.
• There are cases where you cannot listen to an
Internet radio station even if the station can be
selected from a list of radio stations.
Authorizing this receiver
In order to be able to play with Home Media Gallery, this
receiver must be authorized. This happens automatically
when the receiver makes a connection over the network
to the PC. If not, please authorize this receiver manually
on the PC. The authorization (or permission) method for
access varies depending on the type of server currently
being connected. For more information on authorizing
this receiver, refer to the instruction manual of your
server.
Playback with Home Media Gallery
VIDEO1
HDMI
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
SOURCE
STATUS
RCV
THX
CH
MUTE
TUNE +
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TOOLS
MENU
T.EDIT
ENTER
ST +
RETURN
TUNE
PHASE CTRL
MPX
CH LEVEL
EON
VOL
Important
• When you play back audio files, ‘Connecting...’ is
displayed before playback starts. The display may
continue for several seconds depending on the type
of file.
• In case a domain is configured in a Windows network
environment, you cannot access a PC on the network
while you are logged onto the domain. Instead of
logging onto the domain, log onto the local machine.
• There are cases where the time elapsed may not be
correctly displayed.
• If several clients are playing simultaneously, as the
case may be, playback is interrupted or stalled.
En
TUNER
TV
• If there are problems within the network environment
(heavy network traffic, etc.) content may not be
displayed or played properly (playback may be
interrupted or stalled). For best performance, a
100BASE-TX connection between player and PC is
recommended.
74
TV CONTROL
INPUT
MUTE
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
PTY
SEARCH
• Playback may stall when the PC is switched off or any
media files stored on it are deleted while playing
content.
Microsoft®, Windows®Vista, Windows®XP, Windows®2000,
Windows®Millennium Edition, Windows®98, and WindowsNT® are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and/or other countries.
PHONO
ST
About playback behavior over a network
Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and
cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft
Licensing, Inc.
TV
CD-R
TOP MENU
BAND
• Supported file formats vary by server. As such, files
not supported by your server are not displayed on this
unit. For more information check with the
manufacturer of your server.
Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of the
player and/or the Home Media Gallery features due to
communication error/malfunctions associated with your
network connection and/or your PC, or other connected
equipment. Please contact your PC manufacturer or
Internet service provider.
VIDEO3
INPUT SELECT
• Some functions may not be supported depending on
the server type or version used.
• Depending on the security software installed on a
connected PC and the setting of such software,
network connection may be blocked.
VIDEO2
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
1
Set the operation selector switch to SOURCE.
2 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to select Home
Media Gallery as the input source.
It may take several seconds for this receiver to access the
network. The following screen appears when the Home
Media Gallery is selected as the input source.
Top Menu
A/V RECEIVER
1
USB
Internet Radio
Neural Music Direct
******
Favorites
Setup
1/ 6
The server without the
mark cannot be accessed.
SCLX81_71.book Page 75 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
3 Use / to select the category you want to play
back, and then press ENTER.
Select a category from the following list:
10
• In case of an iPod
iPod
Top Menu
A/V RECEIVER
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Podcasts
Genres
Composers
Audiobooks
1/ 9
• iPod – iPod1
• USB – USB memory device1
• Internet Radio – Internet radio
• Neural Music Direct – Internet radio that supports
Neural Surround
iPod CTRL
Return

• Server Name – Server components on the network
• Favorites – Favorite songs currently being registered
Track Title
Top Menu
PLAY
0003:02
-0002:02
Artist Name
Depending on the selected category, the names of
folders, files, and Internet radio stations are displayed.
4 Use / to select the folder, music/photo files or
Internet radio station to play back, and then press
ENTER.
Press / to scroll up and down the list and select the
desired item. When you press ENTER, playback starts
with the playback screen being displayed for the selected
item. To return to the list screen, press RETURN.2
• In case of a USB memory device or a server
******
Top Menu
A/V RECEIVER
Shuffle On
Album Title
iPod
Now Playing
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx
Chapter Number : xxxxxxxxxxx
iPod CTRL
List
• In case of Internet radio
Top Menu
Internet Radio
A/V RECEIVER
Folder1
Folder2
Folder3
Folder4
Folder5
Folder6
Folder7
Folder8
1 / 32
Folder1
Folder2
Folder3
Music1
Music2
Music3
Photo1
Photo2
1/ 8
Return

Track Title
Top Menu
PLAY
Return
0003:02
-0002:02
Artist Name
Random On
Channel Name

Internet Radio
Track Title
Top Menu
PLAY
0003:02
Now Playing
-0002:02
Artist Name
Random On
Album Title
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx
Buffer : xxxxxxxxxxx
Return
Server
Now Playing
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx
Buffer : xxxxxxxxxxx
Return
Only audio files with the mark and photo files with the
mark can be played. In case of the folders with the
mark, use / and ENTER to select the desired folder
and audio/photo files. When a photo file is selected, the
photo is displayed.
5 Repeat Step 4 to play back the desired song or
photo.
For detailed operating instructions, refer to the section
shown below.
• iPod – See Playing back audio files stored on an iPod
on page 76.
• USB – See Playing back audio files stored on a USB
memory device on page 77 and Playing back photo
files stored in components on the network or USB
memory device on page 78.
Note
1 This is not displayed if no iPod or USB memory device is connected.
2 When the list screen is displayed from the playback screen, the playback screen reappears automatically if no operation is performed for 5
seconds while the list screen is displayed.
75
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 76 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
10
• Internet radio stations – See Listening to Internet
radio stations on page 78.
• Server – See Playing back audio files stored on
components on the network on page 76 and Playing
back photo files stored in components on the network
or USB memory device on page 78.
Playing back audio files stored on
components on the network
About the playback screen
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod
To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage
of the OSD of your TV connected to this receiver.1 You can
also control all operations for music in the front panel
display of this receiver.
Finding what you want to play
When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can
browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist,
album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to
using your iPod directly.
The following screen appears when you play back audio
files. Note that some items may not be displayed
depending on the type of file.
Track Title
Top Menu
PLAY
0003:02
-0002:02
Artist Name
Random On
Album Title
Track title or File name
Play mode
Artist name
Album title or Folder
name
Server
Now Playing
Playing time
File information
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx
Buffer : xxxxxxxxxxx
Return
You can perform the following operations with the remote
control of this receiver. Note that some buttons are not
available for operation depending on the category
currently being played back.
Button(s)
Function

Press to start playback.
If you start playback when something other than a
song is selected, all the songs that fall into that
category will play.

Pauses playback.
/
Press to skip to previous/next song.
iPod
Top Menu
A/V RECEIVER
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Podcasts
Genres
Composers
Audiobooks
1/ 9
iPod CTRL
Return
1 Use / to select a category, then press ENTER to
browse that category.
• To return to the previous level any time, press
RETURN.
2 Use / to browse the selected category (e.g.,
albums).
• Use / to move to previous/next levels.
3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you
want to play, then press  to start playback.2
Track Title
Top Menu
PLAY
0003:02
-0002:02
Artist Name
Shuffle On
Album Title
iPod
Now Playing
Press repeatedly to switch among Repeat One
and Repeat Off (available only during playback).
When browsing, press to move to previous/next
levels.
DISP
Press repeatedly to change the song playback
information displayed in the front panel display. (If
the list screen is displayed, switch to the playback
screen.)
ENTER
When browsing, press to move to next levels.
During playback, press to set the play and pause
modes.
iPod CTRL
TOP MENU Press to return to the Top Menu screen.
RETURN
Press to return to the previous level.
Note
1 • The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver.
• Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as #.
• This feature is not available for photos or video clips on your iPod.
2 If you’re in the song category, you can also press ENTER to start playback.
76
En
Playing time
File information
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx
Chapter Number : xxxxxxxxxxx
Press repeatedly to switch between Random On
and Random Off (available only during playback).
/
Track title
Play mode
Artist name
Album title
List
SCLX81_71.book Page 77 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
Navigation through categories on your iPod looks like
this:
Playlists  Songs
Artists  Albums  Songs
Albums  Songs
Songs
Podcasts
Genres  Artists  Albums  Songs
Composers  Albums  Songs
Audiobooks
Shuffle Songs
Tip
• You can play all of the songs in a particular category
by selecting the All item at the top of each category
list. For example, you can play all the songs by a
particular artist.
Basic playback controls
The following table shows the basic playback controls for
your iPod. Set the operation selector switch to SOURCE,
then press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to switch the
remote control to the iPod operation mode.
Button
What it does

Press to start playback.
If you start playback when something other than a
song is selected, all the songs that fall into that
category will play.

Pauses playback.
/
Press and hold during playback to start scanning.
/
Press to skip to previous/next track.
: Press to switch to Repeat All (available only
during playback).
: Press to switch to Repeat One (available
1
only during playback).
Press repeatedly to switch between Shuffle On
and Shuffle Off.
DISP
Press repeatedly to change the song playback
information displayed in the front panel display.
ENTER
When browsing, press to move to next levels.
During playback, press to set the play and pause
modes.
RETURN
When browsing, press to move to previous levels.
10
Button
What it does
/
When browsing, press to move to previous/next
levels.
/
During Audiobook playback, press to switch the
playback speed: Faster  Normal  Slower
TOP MENU Press to return to the Top Menu screen.
Switching the iPod controls1
You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod
and the receiver.
1 Set the operation selector switch to SOURCE, then
press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod controls.2
This enables operation and display on your iPod, and this
receiver’s remote control and OSD become inactive.
2 Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to the receiver
controls.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
Playing back audio files stored on a USB
memory device
The maximum number of levels that you can select in
Step 4 (page 75) is 8. Also, you can display and play back
up to 2000 folders and files within a single folder.3
Finding what you want to play
1 Use / to select a folder, then press ENTER to
browse that folder.
• To return to the previous level any time, press
RETURN.
Top Menu
USB
A/V RECEIVER
Folder1
Folder2
Folder3
Music1
Music2
Music3
Photo1
Photo2
1/ 9
Return
Note
1 You cannot use this function, when an iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first generation is connected.
2 When this function is set, iPod images cannot be played on this receiver.
3 • Playback stops when the last song in a folder is played back to the end.
• When a USB memory device with a large capacity is connected, it may take some time to read all the contents.
• This receiver does not support a USB hub.
• Copyrighted audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.
• DRM-protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.
77
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 78 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
10
2 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you
want to play, then press  to start playback.1
Track Title
Top Menu
PLAY
0003:02
-0002:02
Artist Name
Random On
Album Title
Track title or File name
Play mode
Artist name
Album title or Folder name
USB
Now Playing
Playing time
File information
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx
Return
Basic playback controls
The following table shows the basic controls on the
remote for USB playback. Set the operation selector
switch to SOURCE, then press HOME MEDIA GALLERY
to switch the remote control to the USB operation mode.
Button
What it does

Press to start playback.
If you start playback when something other than a
song is selected, all the songs that fall into that
category will play.
• Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched
off.
• Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the
device) for USB power.
If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB
device is incompatible.
Playing back photo files stored in
components on the network or USB memory
device
When you select photo Top Menu or USB list screen, the
Photo Player automatically launches. The selected
content is displayed in full screen by pressing ENTER.
Select a category, folder or device to access the submenu
containing the required file or content.2
Pressing ENTER again allows a slideshow to begin. After
a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER toggles between
play and pause. Instead of pressing ENTER twice, you
can press  to start the slideshow immediately.
Basic playback controls

Pauses playback.
Button(s)
Function
/
Press to skip to previous/next track.
ENTER
Starts displaying a photo or playing a slideshow.
: Press to switch to Repeat All (available only
during playback).
RETURN,
, 
Stops the Player and returns to the previous
menu.

Displays the previous photo content.

Display the next photo content.

Plays a slideshow.

Pauses the slideshow.
: Press to switch to Repeat One (available
1
only during playback).
Press repeatedly to switch between Random On
and Random Off.
DISP
Press repeatedly to change the song playback
information displayed in the front panel display.
ENTER
When browsing, press to move to next levels.
During playback, press to set the play and pause
modes.
RETURN
When browsing, press to move to previous levels.
/
When browsing, press to move to previous/next
levels.
TOP MENU Press to return to the Top Menu.
Important
If a USB ERROR1 message lights in the display, the
power requirements of the USB device are too high for
this receiver. Try following the points below:
Listening to Internet radio stations
About Internet radio
Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service
transmitted via the Internet. There are a large number of
Internet radio stations broadcasting a variety of services
from every corner of the world. Some are hosted,
managed, and broadcast by private individuals while
others are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial
radio stations or radio networks. Whereas terrestrial, or
OTA (over-the-air), radio stations are geographically
restricted on the range of radio waves broadcast from a
transmitter through the air, Internet radio stations are
accessible from anywhere in the world, as long as there
• Switch the receiver off, then on again.
Note
1 • If the file selected cannot be played back, this receiver automatically skips to the next file playable.
• When the file currently being played back has no title assigned to it, the file name is displayed in the OSD instead; when neither the album
name nor the artist name is present, the row is displayed as a blank space.
• Note that non-roman characters in the playlist are displayed as #.
2 If a single photo file is displayed for 5 minutes, the list screen reappears. In the same way, the list screen reappears if the slide show is left in
the pause mode for 5 minutes.
78
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 79 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
is a connection to the Internet, as services are not
transmitted through the air but are delivered over the
World Wide Web. On this receiver you can select Internet
radio stations by genre as well as by region.
2
10
Use / to select ‘Help’, then press ENTER.
Top Menu
A/V RECEIVER
About the playback screen
The following screen appears when audio streams from
an Internet radio station are received. This screen is only
an example and the actual screen could be different
depending on the radio station you select.
Track Title
Top Menu
PLAY
0003:02
-0002:02
Artist Name
Random On
Channel Name
Track title
Play mode
Artist name
Channel name
Return
3 Use / to select ‘Get access code’, then press
ENTER.
The access code required for registration on the special
Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed. Make a memo of
this address.
Top Menu
Internet Radio
Internet Radio
Folder25
Folder26
Folder27
Folder28
Folder29
Folder30
Folder31
Help
32 / 32
Help
Top Menu
Get access code
A/V RECEIVER
Now Playing
Playing time
File information
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx
Buffer : xxxxxxxxxxx
Return
About list of Internet radio
The list of Internet radio stations on this receiver is
created, edited, and managed by the vTuner database
service exclusively for use with this receiver. For details
about vTuner, see vTuner on page 86.
Saving and retrieving Internet radio stations
A/V RECEIVER
access code
ABC1234
Registration help
Get access code
Show Your WebID/PW
Reset Your WebID/PW
FAQ
1/ 5
1/ 2
Return
Return
The following can be checked on the Help screen:
• Get access code – The access code required for
registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site
is displayed.
You can easily save and retrieve saved Internet radio
stations. See Advanced operations for Internet radio on
page 82 for more on this.1
• Show Your WebID/PW – After registering on the
special Pioneer Internet radio site, the registered ID
and password are displayed.
Registering broadcast stations not on the vTuner
list from the special Pioneer site
• Reset Your WebID/PW – Resets all the information
registered on the special Pioneer Internet radio site.
When reset, all the registered broadcast stations are
also cleared. If you want to listen to the same
stations, re-register after resetting.
With the receiver, broadcast stations not included on the
list of station distributed by vTuner can be registered and
played. Check the access code required for registration
on the receiver, use this access code to access the
special Pioneer Internet radio site and register the
desired broadcast stations in your favorites. The address
of the special Pioneer Internet radio site is:
http://www.radio-pioneer.com
1 Display the Internet Radio list screen.
To display the Internet Radio list screen, perform steps 1
to 3 at Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 74.
4 Access the special Pioneer Internet radio site from
your computer and perform the registration process.
http://www.radio-pioneer.com
Access the above site and use the access code in step 3
to perform user registration, following the instructions on
the screen.
5 Register the desired broadcast stations as your
favorites, following the instructions on the computer’s
screen.
Both broadcast stations not on the vTuner list and
stations on the vTuner list can be registered. In this case
they are registered on the receiver as favorite broadcast
stations and can be played.
Note
1 • To listen to Internet radio stations, you must have high-speed broadband Internet access. With a 56 K or ISDN modem, you may not enjoy
the full benefits of Internet radio.
• The port number varies depending on the Internet radio station. Check the firewall settings.
• A list of Internet radio stations provided by the vTuner database service is subject to change or deletion without notice due to various reasons.
• Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted depending on the Internet radio station. In this case, you cannot listen to a radio station selected
from the list of Internet radio stations.
79
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 80 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
10
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
Listening to Neural Music Direct
About Neural Music Direct
Neural Music Direct is an Internet radio station managed
and operated by Neural THX. Neural radio stations deliver
multichannel surround sound. The Neural-THX Surround
mode is automatically selected and lets you enjoy a rich
multichannel surround sound experience. For details
about Neural THX, see the operation manual supplied
separately.
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Corporation,
THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered in some
jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
Playing back your favorite songs
About the Favorites folder
You can register up to 20 of your favorite songs in the
Favorites folder. Note that only the audio files stored on
components on the network can be registered.
Registering and deleting audio files and Internet
radio stations in and from the Favorites folder
Press PGM while a song is being played back or stopped.
The selected song is then registered in the Favorites
folder.
Up to 20 songs or Internet radio stations can be
registered. Songs stored on a USB memory device and
iPod cannot be registered.
To delete a registered song, select the Favorites folder,
select the song you want to delete from the folder, and
press CLR. The selected song is then deleted from the
Favorites folder.
80
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 81 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
10
About playable file formats
The Home Media Gallery feature of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not
available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats. Also, the compatibility of file formats varies depending
on the type of server. Check with your server to ensure the compatibility of file formats supported by your server.
Music files
Category
Extension
Stream
MP3a
.mp3
MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3
LPCM
WAV
WMA
—b
.wav
.wma
LPCM
LPCM
WMA2/7/8
WMA9
AAC
FLAC
.m4a
.aac
.3gp
.3g2
.flac
MPEG-4 AAC LC
MPEG-4 HE AAC
(aacPlus v1/2)
FLAC
Sampling frequency
8 kHz to 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate
16 bit
Channel
2 ch
Bitrate
8 kbps to 320 kbps
VBR/CBR
Supported/Supported
Sampling frequency
8 kHz to 44.1 kHz
Quantization bitrate
16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit
Channel
2 ch
Sampling frequency
8 kHz to 44.1 kHz
Quantization bitrate
16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit
Channel
2 ch
Sampling frequency
8 kHz to 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate
16 bit
Channel
2 ch
Bitrate
5 kbps to 320 kbps
VBR/CBR
Supported/Supported
Sampling frequency
8 kHz to 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate
16 bit
Channel
2 ch
Bitrate
5 kbps to 320 kbps
VBR/CBR
Supported/Supported
Sampling frequency
32 kHz to 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate
16 bit
Channel
2 ch
Bitrate
16 kbps to 320 kbps
VBR/CBR
Supported/Supported
Sampling frequency
8 kHz, 16 kHz, 22 kHz, 32
kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate
8 bit, 16 bit
Channel
2 ch (8-bit monaural audio
is not supported)
Bitrate
—
VBR/CBR
Not supported/Supported
a.“MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”
b.Only streaming data from servers is concerned, so there is no extension.
81
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 82 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
10
Photo files
1
Files of up to 12 M pixels can be played. Progressive JPEG
images are not supported.
2 Select the class that you want to retrieve an
Internet radio station from.
Each time you press CLASS, the class switches to A, B,
and C in turn.
Category
Extension
JPEG
.jpg
.jpeg
Advanced operations for Internet radio
TV
CH
SOURCE
RCV
VOL
AUTO/
DIRECT
STEREO/
A.L.C.
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
TUNE +
TOP MENU
BAND
ST
ENTER
PTY
SEARCH
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
STATUS
BD MENU
MUTE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TOOLS
SR+
SBch
DIMMER
AUDIO
Setting up the network
MCACC
DISP
A.ATT
MENU
T.EDIT
D.ACCESS
ST +
CLR
GENRE HDMI OUT
CLASS
CH
ENTER
RETURN
CH LEVEL
Saving Internet radio stations
This receiver can remember the Internet radio stations
that you often listen to in 3 classes (A, B, and C) with up
to 10 stations in each class to make the total of 30
stations at its maximum capacity.
Before proceeding with the following steps, check
whether you have followed Steps 2 to 4 on page 74.
1
Set the operation selector switch to SOURCE.
2 Tune into the Internet radio station that you want
to save.
Tune into the desired Internet radio station by following
Steps 2 to 4 on page 74.
3
‘Preset Not Stored’ appears when you select an Internet
radio station currently not being saved.
STANDARD ADV SURR
TUNE
PHASE CTRL
3 Use / to select the station number that you
want to retrieve.
You can also select the station number by using the
number buttons.
PGM
VOL
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
TV CONTROL
INPUT
MUTE
Set the operation selector switch to SOURCE.
Press T.EDIT to switch to the station-saving mode.
4 Press CLASS to select the class that you want to
save the station in.
Select the desired class from A, B, and C.
5 Use / to select the number that you want to
save the station as, and then press ENTER.
You can also select the station number by using the
number buttons. Select the desired number from 0 to 9.
Retrieving saved Internet radio stations
You need to save Internet radio stations first before
retrieving them. If there are no Internet radio stations
currently being saved, see Saving Internet radio stations
above and save at least one Internet radio station before
proceeding with the following steps.
In case the router connected to the LAN terminal on this
receiver is a broadband router (with the built-in DHCP
server function), simply turn on the DHCP server
function, and you will not need to set up the network
manually. You must set up the network as described
below only when you have connected this receiver to a
server without the DHCP server function. Before you set
up the network, consult with your ISP or the network
manager for the required settings. It is advisory that you
also refer to the operation manual supplied with your
network component.1
IP Address
The IP address to be entered must be defined within the
following ranges. If the IP address defined is beyond the
following ranges, you cannot play back audio files stored
on components on the network or listen to Internet radio
stations.
Class A: 10.0.0.1 to 10.255.255.254
Class B: 172.16.0.1 to 172.31.255.254
Class C: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.255.254
Subnet Mask
In case an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is directly
connected to this receiver, enter the subnet mask
provided by your ISP on paper. In most of the cases, enter
255.255.255.0.
Gateway IP
In case a gateway (router) is connected to this receiver,
enter the corresponding IP address.
DNS Server Preferred/DNS Server Alternate
In case there is only one DNS server address provided by
your ISP on paper, enter ‘DNS Server Preferred’. In case
there are more than two DNS server addresses, enter
‘DNS Server Alternate’ in the other DNS server address
field.
Note
1 In case you make changes to the network configuration without the DHCP server function, make the corresponding changes to the network
settings of this receiver.
82
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 83 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
Proxy Hostname/Proxy Port
This setting is required when you connect this receiver to
the Internet via a proxy server. Enter the IP address of
your proxy server in the ‘Proxy Hostname’ field. Also,
enter the port number of your proxy server in the ‘Proxy
Port’ field.
Tip
VIDEO1
VIDEO2
VIDEO3
TV
CD-R
PHONO
AUTO/
DIRECT
TV CONTROL
INPUT
MUTE
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
INPUT SELECT
HDMI
5 Either ‘Network Found’ or ‘No Network Found’
appears. Check the network connection status and
press ENTER.
• Network Found – Connected to a component on the
network.
• No Network Found – Not connected to a
component on the network.
The Network IP Settings screen appears.
• Press / or the numeric buttons to enter
alphanumeric characters. To delete alphanumeric
characters entered one at a time, press  or
CLEAR. ‘Cancel Key Editing Lose Changes?’
appears when you press RETURN or  while the
cursor is placed in the leftmost position on the
alphanumeric character entry screen. In this case,
press ENTER to exit from the screen and RETURN to
return to the screen.
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
10
TUNER
MUTE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TOOLS
TUNE +
STEREO/
A.L.C.
6 Select ‘Static IP Address’ and press ENTER to
confirm your selection.
The IP address screen appears. When you select
‘Automatic (DHCP)’, the network is automatically set up,
and you do not need to follow Steps 7 to 16. Proceed with
Step 17.
Top Menu
Network IP Settings
A/V RECEIVER
Automatic (DHCP)
Static IP Address
STANDARD ADV SURR
PGM
BD MENU
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
DIMMER
AUDIO
2/ 2
TOP MENU
BAND
MENU
T.EDIT
SR+
SBch
MCACC
DISP
ST
A.ATT
TV
STATUS
1
D.ACCESS
CLASS
CH
ENTER
TUNE
PHASE CTRL
CH LEVEL
CLR
RCV
THX
CH
GENRE HDMI OUT
RETURN
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
SOURCE
MPX
Return
ST +
ENTER
PTY
SEARCH
EON
7 Select ‘Change’ and press ENTER to confirm your
selection.
The Edit IP address screen appears.
VOL
Set the operation selector switch to SOURCE.
Top Menu
A/V RECEIVER
USB
Internet Radio
Neural Music Direct
******
Favorites
Setup
1/ 6
3 Select ‘Setup’ and press ENTER to confirm your
selection.
The Setup screen appears.
1
Top Menu
A/V RECEIVER
192.168.000.002
1/ 5
Return
9 Select ‘Change’ and press ENTER to confirm your
selection.
The Edit Subnet Mask screen appears.
Top Menu
Subnet Mask
Top Menu
Edit Subnet Mask
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
255.255.255.000
Change
Setup
255.255.255.000
Information
Network Setup
2/ 5
Return
6/ 6
Return
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
USB
Internet Radio
Neural Music Direct
******
Favorites
Setup
Edit IP address
8 Enter the IP address.
Press / to select a number and / to move the
cursor. After you select the last number, press  or
ENTER. You can also use the numeric buttons to enter a
number. The Subnet Mask screen appears.
Top Menu
Top Menu
Top Menu
A/V RECEIVER
2 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to select ‘Home
Media Gallery’ as the input source.
It may take several seconds for this receiver to access the
network. The following screen appears when the Home
Media Gallery is selected as the input source.
1
IP address
192.168.000.002
Change
Return
1/ 2
Return
4 Select ‘Network Setup’ and press ENTER to confirm
your selection.
The Network Setup screen appears.
10 Enter the subnet mask.
After entry, press  or ENTER. The Gateway IP screen
appears.
83
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 84 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
10
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
11 Select ‘Change’ and press ENTER to confirm your
selection.
The Edit Gateway IP screen appears.
Gateway IP
Top Menu
Top Menu
Edit Gateway IP
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
17 Select ‘No’ or ‘Yes’ for the proxy server setting to
deactivate or activate the proxy server.
In case you select ‘No’, proceed with Step 22. In case you
select ‘Yes’, on the other hand, proceed with Step 18. The
Proxy Hostname screen appears.
192.168.000.001
Change
Top Menu
Enable Proxy Server
A/V RECEIVER
192.168.000.001
No
Yes
3/ 5
Return
Return
1/ 2
12 Enter the default gateway IP address.
After entry, press  or ENTER. The DNS Server
Preferred screen appears.
Return
13 Select ‘Change’ and press ENTER to confirm your
selection.
The Edit DNS Preferred screen appears.
18 Select ‘Change’ and press ENTER to confirm your
selection.
The Edit Proxy Hostname screen appears.
Top Menu
Proxy Hostname
Top Menu
A/V RECEIVER
Top Menu
DNS Server Preferred
Top Menu
Edit DNS Preferred
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
192.168.000.001
Change
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv
192.168.000.001
2/ 2
4/ 5
Return
Return
Return
14 Enter the preferred DNS server address.
After entry, press  or ENTER. The DNS Server
Alternate screen appears.
15 Select ‘Change’ and press ENTER to confirm your
selection.
The Edit DNS Alternate screen appears.
DNS Server Alternate
Top Menu
20 Select ‘Change’ and press ENTER to confirm your
selection.
The Edit Proxy Port screen appears.
Edit DNS Alternate
Proxy Port
Top Menu
Edit Proxy Port
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
Return
19 Enter the address of your proxy server or the
domain name.
After entry, press  or ENTER. The Proxy Port screen
appears.
Top Menu
Top Menu
Edit Proxy Hostname
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Change
11111
Change
192.168.000.001
Change
11111
192.168.000.001
2/ 2
5/ 5
Return
Return
16 Enter the alternate DNS server address.
In case there is only one DNS address, you do not need
to enter the alternate DNS server address.
After entry, press  or ENTER. The Enable Proxy Server
screen appears.
84
En
Return
Return
21 Enter the port number of your proxy server.
Use the numeric buttons to enter the port number. After
entry, press  or ENTER. The Settings OK? screen
appears.
22 Press ENTER to complete the network setup
procedure.
The Top Menu screen appears.
SCLX81_71.book Page 85 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
10
Checking the network settings
You can check the following network settings of this
receiver: the MAC address, the IP address, the gateway
IP address, the proxy server, the Subnet mask, and the
firmware version (for the Home Media Gallery of this
receiver).
Before proceeding with the following steps, check
whether you have followed Steps from 1 to 3 on page 83.
1 Select ‘Information’ and press ENTER to confirm
your selection.
The Firmware Version (for the Home Media Gallery of
this receiver) screen appears.
Top Menu
Glossary
Default Gateway
Default Gateway is a node on a computer network that
serves as an access point to another network. A default
gateway (such as a computer and router) is used to
forward all traffic that is not addressed to a station within
the local subnet.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
Server
A DHCP server is a server that allocates IP addresses to
hosts (network devices). In most cases, a broadband
router serves as a DHCP server in a home network.
Firmware Version
A/V RECEIVER
X.X.XX.XXX
DLNA
1/ 6
Return
(The version of the illustration is not the latest.)
2 Check the network settings.
Press / to switch the display. Each time you press /
, the display switches as follows.
Firmware Version  MAC Address 
IP address  Gateway IP  Proxy Server 
Subnet Mask
3 Press RETURN.
The Setup screen appears. To return to the Top Menu
screen, press RETURN again.
Software update
Information on software updates may be posted on the
Pioneer website.
http://www.pioneer.eu
The DLNA authorized logo makes it easy for consumers
to recognize products that meet the new standard for
home network PCs and other digital devices, as set down
in the DLNA Guidelines for interoperability. This allows
music, video, etc. to be enjoyed from various devices over
a home network. This unit is compatible with music,
photo and video content, and is based on the DLNA
Home Networked Device Interoperability Guidelines v1.0.
This unit can be used to playback music, photos and
video stored on a DLNA-compatible server connected
through a LAN cable.
Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is dedicated to
the simplified sharing of digital content, such as digital
music, photos and video among networked consumer
electronics (CE) and PCs. By establishing a platform of
interoperability based on open industry standards, DLNA
delivers technical design guidelines that companies can
use to develop digital home products that share content
through wired or wireless networks in the home.
DNS
DNS is an abbreviation for the Domain Name System,
which stores and associates many types of information
with domain names. Most importantly, DNS translates
domain names (computer hostnames or sitenames,
such as www.pioneerelectronics.com) to IP addresses
(such as 63.83.249.102).
Ethernet
A frame-based computer networking technology for local
area networks (LANs). This player supports 100BASE-TX
and 10BASE-T.
FLAC
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) is an audio format
allows lossless codec. Audio is compressed in FLAC
without any loss in quality. For more details about FLAC,
visit the following website: http://flac.sourceforge.net/
85
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 86 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
10
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
IP (Internet Protocol) address
A unique number that devices use in order to identify and
communicate with each other on a network utilizing the
Internet Protocol standard, such as ‘192.168.0.1’. No
duplicate numbers are allowed in the network.
“This product is protected by certain intellectual property
rights of NEMS and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such
technology outside of this product is prohibited without a
license from NEMS and BridgeCo or an authorized
subsidiary.”
LAN
Windows Media
LAN is an abbreviation for the Local Area Network, which
is a computer network covering a small geographical
area, like a home, office, or group of buildings. Current
LANs are most likely to be based on switched IEEE 802.3
Ethernet technology, running at 10, 100, or 1000 Mbit/s,
or on IEEE 802.11 Wi-Fi technology.
Windows Media is a multimedia framework for media
creation and distribution for Microsoft Windows.
Windows Media is either a registered trademark or
trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or
other countries. Use an application licensed by Microsoft
Corporation to author, distribute, or play Windows Media
formatted content. Using an application unauthorized by
Microsoft Corporation is subject to malfunction.
MAC (Media Access Control) address
An address attached to the port of any network device
with an IP address. The MAC address is expressed as
“00:e0:36:xx:xx:xx” and cannot be changed.
Mass Storage Class devices
The standard provides an interface to a variety of storage
devices, such as USB flash drive and digital cameras.
Neural Surround
Neural Surround represents the latest advancement in
surround technology and has been adopted by FM Radio
and Neural Music Direct for broadcasts of surround
recordings and live events.
Windows Media Player 11/
Windows Media Connect
Windows Media Connect is software to deliver music,
photos and movies from a Microsoft Windows XP
computer to home stereo systems and TVs.
Subnet mask
At this time you cannot download the Windows Media
Connect software from Microsoft’s website. If your server
currently does not have Windows Media Connect
installed, install Windows Media Player 11 (for Windows
XP) instead. This software can be downloaded from
Microsoft’s website.
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
USB provides a serial bus standard for connecting
devices, usually to computers such as PCs. This receiver
supports the Mass Storage Class.
vTuner
vTuner is a paid online database service that allows you
to listen to radio and TV broadcasts on the Internet.
vTuner lists thousands of stations from over 100 different
countries around the globe. For more detail about
vTuner, visit the following website:
http://www.radio-pioneer.com
En
Windows Media DRM is a DRM (Digital Rights
Management) service for the Windows Media platform. It
is designed to provide secure delivery of audio and/or
video content over an IP network to a PC or other
playback device in such a way that the distributor can
control how that content is used. The WMDRM-protected
content can only be played back on a component
supporting the WMDRM service.
Neural Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency
domain processing which allows delivery of a more
detailed sound stage with superior localization of
surround elements. System playback is scalable from
stereo up to state-of-the-art multichannel surround.
The IP address is divided into the network address part
and the host address part. The subnet mask is expressed
as ‘255.255.255.0’. In most cases, the subnet mask is
automatically assigned by the DHCP server.
86
Windows Media DRM
With this software, you can play back files stored on the
PC through various devices wherever you like in your
home.
For more information check the official Microsoft
website.
SCLX81_71.book Page 87 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
HDMI Control
11
Chapter 11
HDMI Control
Important
Important
• When connecting this system or changing
connections, be sure to switch the power off and
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.
After completing all connections, connect the power
cords to the wall socket.
• The KURO LINK function name used on the web and
in catalogues is referred to as HDMI Control in the
operating instructions and on the product.
By connecting this receiver to an HDMI Controlcompatible Pioneer flat screen TV or the HDD/DVD
recorder with an HDMI cable, you can control this
receiver from the remote control of a connected flat
screen TV, as well as have the connected flat screen TV
automatically change inputs in response to operations
carried out on this unit.
• After connecting this receiver to an AC outlet, a 15
second initialization process begins. You cannot
carry out any operations during initialization. The
HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during
initialization, and you can turn this receiver on once
it has stopped blinking.
Refer to the operating manual for your flat screen TV for
more information about which operations can be carried
out by connecting via HDMI cable.
• To get the most out of this function, we recommend
that you connect your HDMI component not to a flat
screen TV but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on
this receiver.
• You cannot use this function with components that
do not support HDMI Control.
• SC-LX81 only: To use the HDMI control function,
connect this receiver and flat screen TV using the
HDMI OUT 1 terminal. Connecting the HDMI control
compatible component using the HDMI OUT 2
terminal may result in malfunction. If this happens,
turn off the HDMI control compatible component’s
HDMI control setting.
• We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI
Control-compatible components other than those
made by Pioneer.
Making the HDMI Control connections
You can use synchronized operation for a connected flat
screen TV and up to four other components.
• HDMI Control is compatible with up to four units, two
DVD or Blu-ray disc players and two DVD or Blu-ray
disc recorders. (The maximum number of units may
differ depending on the connected flat screen TV.)
Be sure to connect the flat screen TV’s audio cable to the
audio input of this unit.
SC-LX81
12 V
TRIGGER
LAN (10/100)
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD)
HDMI
BD
IN
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
IN 1
1
IN 2
(DVD)
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
AC IN
PB
PR
Y
ANTENNA
(VIDEO2)
2
PR
PB
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
R
PR
PB
L
IN 2 (CD)
VIDEO
Y
MONITOR
OUT
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
FM UNBAL 75
COMPONENT VIDEO
AM LOOP
S-VIDEO
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
L
ZONE 2
OUT
PRE OUT
IN 3 (DVR2)
IR
ZONE 3
OUT
IN
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
IN 2
(DVR1)
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
SIGNAL
GND
CD
IN
CD-R/TAPE
OUT
IN
R
DVD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO1
IN
VIDEO2
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
IN
OUT
IN
MULTI CH IN
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
L
L
R
R
IN
SUBWOOFER
CONTROL
IN
3
IN 4
(CD-R)
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3
R SURROUND BACK/
B
L (Single)
R
SURROUND
L
A R
FRONT
L
CENTER
SELECTABLE
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
ZONE3/
SOURCE
OUT
SOURCE
OUT
SPEAKERS
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
(HDMI
CTRL)
OUT
2
PHONO
IN
OUT
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
OUT
1
VIDEO
SUBWOOFER
1
RS-232C
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
HDMI OUT
HDMI IN
HDMI-compatible monitor or flat screen TV
R
DIGITAL OUT
AUDIO
L
AUDIO OUT
HDMI-equipped component
87
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 88 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
HDMI Control
11
Setting the HDMI options
You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as
HDMI Control-compatible connected components in
order to make use of the HDMI Control function. For
more information see the operating instructions for each
component.
Setting the HDMI Control mode
6 Only when ON was selected at step 5: Select AUTO
or OFF for the PQLS setting.
• AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A precision quartz
controller in this receiver eliminates distortion
caused by timing errors (jitter), giving you the best
possible digital-to-analog conversion from audio CD
sources when you use the HDMI interface. This is
valid as an HDMI function for PQLS-compatible
players.2
• OFF – PQLS is disabled.
Choose whether to set this unit’s HDMI Control function
ON or OFF. You will need to set it to ON to use the HDMI
Control function.
4d4.HDMI Control Setup
A/V RECEIVER
HDMI Control
PQLS
• When using a TV not manufactured by Pioneer, put
this setting to OFF.
:
:
ON
AUTO
1 Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then press
SETUP.
Exit
2
Select ‘System Setup’, then press ENTER.
3
Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.
7 When you’re finished, press HOME MENU.
You will finish to HOME MENU.
4 Select ‘HDMI Control Setup’ from the Other Setup
menu.
4d.Other Setup
4d4.HDMI Control Setup
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
1. Multi Ch In Setup
2. ZONE Audio Setup
3. SR+ Setup
4. HDMI Control Setup
5. Flicker Reduction Setup
Exit
5
HDMI Control
PQLS
:
:
Before using synchronization
Once you have finished all connections and settings, you
must:
ON
AUTO
1
Return
Exit
Finish
Finish
Select the ‘HDMI Control’ setting you want.
• ON – Enables the HDMI Control function. When this
unit’s power is turned off and you have a supported
source begin playback while using the HDMI Control
function, the audio and video output from the HDMI
connection are output from the flat screen TV.1
Put all components into standby mode.
2 Turn the power on for all components, with the
power for the flat screen TV being turned on last.
3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is
connected to this receiver, and see if video output from
connected components displays properly on the screen
or not.
4 Check whether the components connected to all
HDMI inputs are properly displayed.
• OFF – The HDMI Control is disabled. Synchronized
operations cannot be used. When this unit’s power is
turned off, audio and video of sources connected via
HDMI are not output.
Note
1 • When HDMI Control is set to ON, the audio/video signals input at the HDMI IN terminals are output at the HDMI OUT terminal even when
this receiver is switched off.
• With HDMI Control set to ON, Input Setup and HDMI Input are automatically set to off.
2 • When this set is connected by HDMI cable to a Pioneer player that is compatible with the PQLS function via HDMI connection and a CD is
played or HDMI re-authentication is performed (the HDMI indicator blinks), the PQLS effect is enabled and the listening mode is set to stereo.
• If a listening mode other than stereo is selected while the PQLS effect is enabled, the PQLS effect is disabled.
88
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 89 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
HDMI Control
11
Synchronized amp mode
About PQLS
Synchronized amp mode begins once you carry out an
operation for the flat screen TV. For more information,
see the operating manual of your flat screen TV.
PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a digital audio
signal transfer control technology using the KURO LINK
(HDMI Control) function. It offers higher-quality audio
playback by controlling audio signals from the receiver to
a PQLS compatible player, etc. This enables removing
jitter that has a negative effect on the quality of the sound
and is generated upon transmission.
Synchronized amp mode operations
By connecting a component to this receiver with an
HDMI cable you can use synchronized amp mode, which
allows you to synchronize the following operations1:
• Displays on the flat screen TV when you mute or
adjust the volume of this receiver.
• The input of this receiver is automatically changed
when playback occurs on a connected component.
• Even if you change this receiver’s input to a device
that is not connected by HDMI, the synchronized
amp mode remains in effect.
• This receiver’s input switches automatically when the
channel is switched on an HDMI control-compatible
flat screen TV.
• This receiver’s OSD language switches automatically
when the menu language is switched on an HDMI
control-compatible flat screen TV.
• By pressing GENRE when listening to a source from
a HDD/DVD recorder, the most appropriate listening
mode is automatically selected (see Using the genre
synchronizing function on page 40 for more on this).
Canceling synchronized amp mode
Operate the flat screen TV to cancel the synchronized
amp mode.
If you cancel synchronized amp mode while connected
via HDMI to a flat screen TV or while you are watching a
TV programme, the power for this unit is turned off.
About HDMI Control
• Connect the flat screen TV directly to this receiver.
Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or
an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause
operational errors.
• Only connect components you intend to use as a
source to the HDMI input of this receiver.
Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or
an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause
operational errors.
Note
1 The linked mode remains in effect even when this receiver’s input is switched to something other than HDMI.
89
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 90 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Other Settings
12
Chapter 12:
Other Settings
The Input Setup menu
You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu
if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to
the default settings (see Input function default and
possible settings on page 91). In this case, you need to
tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which
terminal so the buttons on the remote control
correspond to the components you’ve connected.
RECEIVER MAIN
ZONE2
SOURCE
3
MULTI
OPERATION
BD
DVR1
DVR2
VIDEO1
VIDEO2
VIDEO3
TV
CD-R
PHONO
TV
SOURCE
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
TUNE +
MUTE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TOOLS
CH
TUNER
MENU
T.EDIT
ST
RCV
ST +
ENTER
PTY
SEARCH
VOL
VOL
RETURN
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
STATUS
INPUT SELECT
HDMI
MUTE
TOP MENU
BAND
DVD
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
INPUT
TUNE
PHASE CTRL
CH LEVEL
TVCONTROL
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use RECEIVER to switch on.
2 Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then press
HOME MENU.
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use /
// and ENTER to navigate through the screens
and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and
exit the current menu.
3
Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU.
4
Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.
4.SystemSetup
4b.Input Setup
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
a.Manual SP Setup
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Language
d. Other Setup
Exit
Return
INPUT
Input Name
:
:
DVD
Default
Digital In
HDMI Input
Component In
12V Trigger1
12V Trigger2
PDP In (SR+)
:
:
:
:
:
:
COAX-1
--Comp-1
OFF
OFF
OFF
Exit
6 Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your
component.
For example, if your DVD player only has an optical
output, you will need to change the DVD input function’s
Digital In setting from COAX-1 (default) to the optical
input you’ve connected it to.The numbering (OPT-1 to 4)
corresponds with the numbers beside the inputs on the
back of the receiver.
• If you change the setting to an input that has been
previously assigned to another function (for example,
TV/SAT), then the setting for that function will
automatically be switched off.
• If your component is connected via a component
video cable to an input terminal other than the
default, you must tell the receiver which input
terminal your component is connected to, or else you
may see the S-Video or composite video signals
instead of the component video signals.1
7 When you’re finished, proceed to the settings for
other inputs.
There are three optional settings in addition to the
assignment of the input jacks:
• Input Name – You can choose to rename the input
function for easier identification. Select Rename to
do so, or Default to return to the system default.
4b.Input Setup
5 Select the input function that you want to set up.
The default names correspond with the names next to the
terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD or VIDEO 1)
which, in turn, correspond with the names on the remote
control.
A/V RECEIVER
:
:
DVD
Default
INPUT
Input Name
:
:
DVD
Rename
Digital In
HDMI Input
Component In
12V Trigger1
12V Trigger2
PDP In (SR+)
:
:
:
:
:
:
COAX-1
--Comp-1
OFF
OFF
OFF
Digital In
HDMI Input
Component In
12V Trigger1
12V Trigger2
PDP In (SR+)
:
:
:
:
:
:
COAX-1
--Comp-1
OFF
OFF
OFF
Exit
Finish
4b.Input Setup
A/V RECEIVER
INPUT
Input Name
Finish
Exit
Finish
• 12V Trigger 1/2 – After connecting a component to
one of the 12 volt triggers (see Switching components
on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 68), select
MAIN, ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or OFF for the corresponding
trigger setting to switch it on automatically along
with the (main or sub) zone specified.
• PDP In (SR+) – To control certain functions on this
receiver from a flat screen TV, select the display input
to which you’ve connected the receiver.2
8 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the System Setup menu.
Note
1 For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in Setting the Video options
on page 96), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.
2 You will have to make an SR+ cable connection from a CONTROL OUT jack on the display to the CONTROL IN jack on this receiver (opposite
from the setup in Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat screen TV on page 68). Note that to control this receiver using the remote, you will have
to point it at the flat screen TV’s remote sensor after making this connection.
90
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 91 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Other Settings
12
Input function default and possible settings
The terminals on the rear of the receiver generally
correspond to the name of one of the input source
functions. If you have connected components to this
receiver differently from (or in addition to) the defaults
below, see The Input Setup menu on page 90 to tell the
receiver how you’ve connected up. The dots () indicate
possible assignments.
Input Terminals
Input
source
Digital
HDMI
Component
DVD
COAX-1
a
IN 1
BD
(BD)
The language used on the on-screen display can be
changed.
1 Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then press
HOME MENU.
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use /
// and ENTER to navigate through the screens
and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and
exit the current menu.
2
TV/SAT
OPT-1
a

DVR 1
OPT-2
a

DVR 2
COAX-3b
a

OPT-3
a
IN 2
VIDEO 2

a
IN 3
VIDEO 3
(Fixed)
a

3 Select ‘OSD Language’ from the System Setup
menu.
4.SystemSetup
(HDMI-2)
HDMI 3
(HDMI-3)
MULTI CH
IN
CD-R/TAPE
A/V RECEIVER
Language :
English
OK
Exit
4
Return
Exit
Return
Select the desired language.
• English
• French
a
• German
HOME
MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
4c.OSD Language
a.Manual SP Setup
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Language
d. Other Setup
(HDMI-1)
HDMI 2
Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU.
A/V RECEIVER
VIDEO 1
HDMI 1
Changing the OSD display language
(OSD Language)
• Italian
• Spanish
• Dutch
COAX-2
• Russian
OPT-4
TUNER
5
Select ‘OK’ to change the language.
PHONO
4c.OSD Language
A/V RECEIVER
a.With HDMI Control set to ON, assignments cannot be made (see
HDMI Control on page 87).
b.SC-LX81 only
Language :
English
OK
Exit
Return
6 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the System Setup menu.
91
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 92 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Other Settings
12
Multi Channel Input Setup
The Other Setup menu
The Other Setup menu is where you can make
customized settings to reflect how you are using the
receiver.
1 Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then press
HOME MENU.
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use /
// and ENTER to navigate through the screens
and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and
exit the current menu.
2
Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU.
3
Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.
4.SystemSetup
1 Select ‘Multi Ch In Setup’ from the Other Setup
menu.
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
1. Multi Ch In Setup
2. ZONE Audio Setup
3. SR+ Setup
4. HDMI Control Setup
5. Flicker Reduction Setup
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
a.Manual SP Setup
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Language
d. Other Setup
Exit
You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a multichannel input. Also, when the multi-channel input is
selected as an input source, you can display the video
images of other input sources. In the Multi Channel Input
Setup, you can assign a video input to the multi-channel
input.
Exit
1. Multi Ch In Setup
2. ZONE Audio Setup
3. SR+ Setup
4. HDMI Control Setup
5. Flicker Reduction Setup
Return
Exit
2
Return
4 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to
adjust these settings in order:
Return
Select the ‘SW Input Gain’ setting you want.
• 0dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level
originally recorded on the source.
• +10dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level
increased by 10 dB.
4d1.Multi Ch In Setup
A/V RECEIVER
SW Input Gain
Video Input
:
:
0dB
DVD
• Multi Ch In Setup – Specifies the optional settings
for a multi-channel input.
• ZONE Audio Setup – Specify your volume setting for
a MULTI-ZONE setup (see ZONE Audio Setup on
page 93).
• SR+ Setup – Specify how you want to control your
Pioneer flat screen TV (see SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat
screen TVs on page 93).
• HDMI Control Setup – Synchronizes this receiver
with your Pioneer component supporting HDMI
Control (see Setting the HDMI Control mode on
page 88).
• Flicker Reduction – Adjust the way the OSD screen
looks (see Flicker Reduction Setup on page 93).
Exit
Finish
3 Select the ‘Video Input’ setting you want.
When the multi-channel input is selected as an input
source, you can display the video images of other input
sources. The video input can be selected from the
following: DVD, TV/SAT, DVR 1, DVR 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO
2, VIDEO 3, OFF.
4d1.Multi Ch In Setup
A/V RECEIVER
SW Input Gain
Video Input
:
:
+10dB
DVD
5 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.
Exit
Finish
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
92
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 93 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Other Settings
12
ZONE Audio Setup
2
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTIZONE listening on page 64), you may need to specify your
volume setting.
• ON – When the receiver is switched to one of the
inputs that use the flat screen TV (DVD, for example),
the volume on the flat screen TV is muted so only
sound from the receiver is heard.
1 Select ‘ZONE Audio Setup’ from the Other Setup
menu.
4d.Other Setup
4d2.ZONE Audio Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exit
3 Assign any input source connected to the flat
screen TV to the corresponding input number.
This matches the receiver’s input source with a
numbered video input on the flat screen TV. For example,
assign DVD to input-2 if you have connected the your
DVD video output to video input 2 on the flat screen TV.
A/V RECEIVER
1. Multi Ch In Setup
2. ZONE Audio Setup
3. SR+ Setup
4. HDMI Control Setup
5. Flicker Reduction Setup
ZONE 2 Volume Level :
ZONE 3 Volume Level :
Return
Variable
Variable
Exit
Select the ‘PDP Volume Control’ setting you want.
• OFF – The receiver does not control the volume of the
flat screen TV.
Finish
• The Monitor Out Connect should be set to the input
that you’ve used to connect this receiver to your flat
screen TV.
2 Select the volume level setting of ZONE 2 and
ZONE 3.1
• Variable – Use this setting if you’ve connected a
power amplifier in the sub room (this receiver is
simply being used as a pre-amp) and you will be
using this receiver’s controls to adjust the volume.
4d3.SR+ Setup
A/V RECEIVER
PDP Volume Control :
Monitor Out Connect :
• Fixed – Use this setting if you’ve connected a fully
integrated amplifier (such as another Pioneer VSX
receiver) in the sub room and want to use that
receiver’s volume controls.
With the Fixed setting, the source is sent from this
receiver at maximum volume, so make sure the volume is
quite low in the sub zone at first, and then experiment to
find the correct level.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat screen TVs
Make the following settings if you have connected a
Pioneer flat screen TV to this receiver using an SR+
cable. Note that the number of function settings available
will depend on the flat screen TV you’ve connected.
Exit
Finish
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Flicker Reduction Setup
• Default setting: 4
The OSD’s resolution can be increased. If you feel the
OSD is hard to see, try changing this setting. Note that
the resolution in this setting only affects the OSD; it has
no influence on the video output.
1 Select ‘Flicker Reduction Setup’ from the Other
Setup menu.
4d.Other Setup
4d5.Flicker Reduction Setup
A/V RECEIVER
See also Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat screen TV
on page 68 and Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer flat
screen TV on page 69.
1
OFF
OFF
A/V RECEIVER
1. Multi Ch In Setup
2. ZONE Audio Setup
3. SR+ Setup
4. HDMI Control Setup
5. Flicker Reduction Setup
Flicker Reduction :
4
Select ‘SR+ Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.
4d.Other Setup
4d3.SR+ Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exit
Exit
Return
Exit
Finish
A/V RECEIVER
1. Multi Ch In Setup
2. ZONE Audio Setup
3. SR+ Setup
4. HDMI Control Setup
5. Flicker Reduction Setup
PDP Volume Control :
Monitor Out Connect :
OFF
OFF
2
Select the Flicker Reduction setting you want.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Return
Exit
Finish
Note
1 If you selected ZONE 2 in the Surround back speaker setting on page 57, you won’t be able to change the volume level.
93
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 94 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Using other functions
13
Chapter 13:
Using other functions
Setting the Audio options
There are a number of additional sound settings you can
make using the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. The
defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.
Setting
What it does
DELAY
(Sound
Delay)
Some monitors have a slight
0.0 to 6.0
delay when showing video, so the
(frames)
soundtrack will be slightly out of 1 second = 25
sync with the picture. By adding a frames (PAL)
bit of delay, you can adjust the
Default: 0.0
sound to match the presentation
of the video.
Important
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AUDIO
PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the
current source, settings and status of the receiver.
TV
SOURCE
INPUT
MUTE
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
TUNE +
CH
VOL
MUTE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TOOLS
TOP MENU
BAND
LOUDNESS Used to get good bass and treble
from music sources at low
volumes.
MENU
T.EDIT
RCV
ST
VOL
TVCONTROL
ENTER
PTY
SEARCH
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
STATUS
ST +
RETURN
TUNE
PHASE CTRL
CH LEVEL
1 Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then press
AUDIO PARAMETER.
2 Use / to select the setting you want to adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the
table below for notes on this.
3 Use / to set it as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for each
setting.
4
94
En
MIDNIGHT Allows you to hear effective
surround sound of movies at low
volumes.
What it does
MCACC
(MCACC
preset)
M1. MEMORY 1
Selects your favorite MCACC
to
preset memory when multiple
preset memories are saved. When M6. MEMORY 6
a MCACC preset memory has
Default:
been renamed, the name given is M1. MEMORY 1
displayed.
MCACC OFFa
EQ
(Acoustic
Calibration
EQ)
Switches on/off the effects of EQ
Pro. only for the MCACC preset
memory selected. This setting is
available for each MCACC preset
memory.
S-WAVE
(Standing
Wave)
Switches on/off the effects of
Standing Wave Control only for
the MCACC preset memory
selected. This setting is available
for each MCACC preset memory.
OFFb
ON
OFF
MIDNIGHT
ON
LOUDNESS
ON
Applies the treble and bass tone
controls to a source, or bypasses
them completely.
BASSc
Adjusts the amount of bass.
–6 to +6 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)
TREBLEc
Adjusts the amount of treble.
–6 to +6 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)
S.RTRV
(Sound
Retriever)
When audio data is removed
during the WMA/MP3/MPEG-4
AAC compression process, sound
quality often suffers from an
uneven sound image. The Sound
Retriever feature employs new
DSP technology that helps bring
CD quality sound back to
compressed 2-channel audio by
restoring sound pressure and
smoothing jagged artifacts left
over after compression.
OFF
DNR
(Digital
Noise
Reduction)
May improve the quality of sound
in a noisy source (for example,
cassette or video tape with lots of
background noise) when
switched on.
OFF
DIALOGUE Localizes dialog in the center
(Dialog
channel to make it stand out from
Enhancement) other background sounds in a TV
or movie soundtrack.
OFF
HIBITSMP
(High Bit/
High
Sampling)
(SC-LX71
only)
OFF
Option(s)
ON
MIDNIGHT/
LOUDNESS
OFF
TONE
(Tone
Control)
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.
Setting
Option(s)
Creates a wider dynamic range
with digital sources like CDs or
DVDs (Smoother, more delicate
musical expression can be
achieved by requantizing 16 bit
PCM or 20 bit compressed audio
signals to 24 bits).
BYPASS
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SCLX81_71.book Page 95 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Using other functions
Setting
What it does
DUAL
(Dual
Mono)
Specifies how dual mono
encoded Dolby Digital
soundtracks should be played.
Dual mono is not widely used, but
is sometimes necessary when
two languages need to be sent to
separate channels.
13
Option(s)
CH1 –
Channel 1 is
heard only
CH2 –
Channel 2 is
heard only
CH1 CH2 –
Both channels
heard from
front speakers
DRC
(Dynamic
Range
Control)
Adjusts the level of dynamic
range for movie soundtracks
optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS,
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,
DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master
Audio (you may need to use this
feature when listening to
surround sound at low volumes).
AUTOd
MAX
MID
OFF
LFE ATT
(LFE
Attenuate)
0dB
Some Dolby Digital and DTS
audio sources include ultra-low
–5dB/ –10dB/
bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator
–15dB/ –20dB/
as necessary to prevent the ultraOFF
low bass tones from distorting the
sound from the speakers.
The LFE is not limited when set to
0 dB, which is the recommended
value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB,
–15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is
limited by the respective degree.
When OFF is selected, no sound
is output from the LFE channel.
SACD
GAINe
Brings out detail in SACDs by
maximizing the dynamic range
(during digital processing).
HDMIf
(HDMI
Audio)
Specifies the routing of the HDMI
audio signal out of this receiver
(amp) or through to a TV or flat
screen TV. When THROUGH is
selected, no sound is output from
this receiver.
AMPLIFIER
A. DELAY
(Auto
delay)
This feature automatically
corrects the audio-to-video delay
between components connected
with an HDMI cable. The audio
delay time is set depending on the
operational status of the display
connected with an HDMI cable.
The video delay time is
automatically adjusted according
to the audio delay time.g
OFF
C. WIDTHh
(Center
Width)
(Applicable
only when
using a
center
speaker)
Provides a better blend of the
front speakers by spreading the
center channel between the front
right and left speakers, making it
sound wider (higher settings) or
narrower (lower settings).
0 to 7
Default: 3
0dB
+6 dB
THROUGH
ON
Setting
What it does
DIMENSIONh
Adjusts the depth of the surround
sound balance from front to back,
making the sound more distant
(minus settings), or more forward
(positive settings).
PANORAMAh Extends the front stereo image to
include the surround speakers for
a ‘wraparound’ effect.
Option(s)
–3 to +3
Default: 0
OFF
ON
C. IMAGEi
(Center
Image)
(Applicable
only when
using a
center
speaker)
Adjusts the center image to
0 to 10
create a wider stereo effect with
Defaults:
vocals. Adjust the effect from 0
Neo:6 MUSIC:
(all center channel sent to front
3
right and left speakers) to 10
Neo:6
(center channel sent to the center CINEMA: 10
speaker only).
EFFECT
Sets the effect level for the
currently selected Advanced
Surround mode (each mode can
be set separately).
10 to 90
a.When MCACC OFF is selected, all MCACC preset memories
become deactivated.
b.When EQ OFF is selected, the MCACC indicator does not light even
when a MCACC preset memory is selected.
c.The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON.
d.The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals.
Select MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD.
e.You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD
discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain setting
back to 0 dB.
f. • HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing
synchronized amp mode operations.
• The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play
the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input signals from the TV with
the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See Synchronized amp
mode on page 89.
g.This feature is only available when the connected display supports
the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (‘lip-sync’) for
HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set
A. DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay time manually. For more
details about the lip-sync feature of your display, contact the
manufacturer directly.
h.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.
i. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA
mode.
95
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 96 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Using other functions
13
Setting
Setting the Video options
There are a number of additional picture settings you can
make using the VIDEO PARAMETER menu. The defaults,
if not stated, are listed in bold.
Important
• Note that if an option cannot be selected on the
VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to
the current source, setting and status of the receiver.
INPUT
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
TV
SOURCE
VOL
MUTE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TOOLS
TOP MENU
BAND
MENU
T.EDIT
RCV
ST
CH
MUTE
TUNE +
VOL
ENTER
PTY
SEARCH
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
TVCONTROL
STATUS
ST +
RETURN
CH LEVEL
2 Use / to select the setting you want to adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the
table below for notes on this.
3 Use / to set it as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for each
setting.1
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.
Setting
Specifies the output resolution of
(Resolution) the video signal (when analog
video input signals are output at
the HDMI OUT connector, select
this according to the resolution of
your monitor and the images you
wish to watch).
Option(s)
AUTO
PURE
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p
ASPb
(Aspect)
Specifies the aspect ratio when
analog video input signals are
output at the HDMI output. Make
your desired settings while
checking each setting on your
display (if the image doesn’t
match your monitor type,
cropping or black bands appear).
THROUGH
NORMAL
ZOOM
TUNE
PHASE CTRL
1 Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then press
VIDEO PARAMETER.
4
What it does
RESa
What it does
V. CONV
Converts video signals for output
(Digital
from the MONITOR OUT jacks for
Video
all video types.
Conversion)
Option(s)
ON
OFF
BRIGHT
Adjusts the overall brightness.
(Brightness)
–10 to +10
Default: 0
CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast between
light and dark.
–10 to +10
Default: 0
HUE
Adjusts the red/green balance.
–10 to +10
Default: 0
CHROMA
Adjusts saturation from dull to
bright.
–10 to +10
Default: 0
a.• When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not
compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some cases no picture will
be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change
the setting.
• When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically
according to the capacity of the TV (monitor) connected by HDMI.
When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same
resolution as when input (At this time, video signals are only output
from the same type of terminals to which they were input).
• This setting is valid for HDMI and component outputs.
b.If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect
ratio on the source component or on the monitor.
Making an audio or a video recording
You can make an audio or a video recording from the
built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source
connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV).2
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an
analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the
components you are recording to/from are hooked up in
the same way (see Connecting your equipment on
page 14 for more on connections).
Since the video converter is not available when making
recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use
the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder
as you used to connect your video source (the one you
want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must
connect your recorder using S-Video if your source has
also been connected using S-Video.
For more information about video connections, see
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other video
sources on page 21.
Note
1 • All of the setting items can be set for each input source.
• Setting items other than V. CONV can only be selected when V. CONV is set to ON.
2 • The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.
• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.
• Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.
96
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 97 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Using other functions
MULTI
OPERATION
DVD
BD
DVR1
TV
PARAMETER
EXIT
13
TUNE +
PARAMETER
TOOLS
DVR1
DVR2
TOP MENU
BAND
VIDEO1
VIDEO2
VIDEO3
DVR2
TV
CD-R
PHONO
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
MENU
T.EDIT
ST
ENTER
PTY
SEARCH
ST +
RETURN
INPUT SELECT
HDMI
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
TUNER
STATUS
THX
AUTO/
DIRECT
TUNE
PHASE CTRL
MPX
STEREO/
A.L.C.
CH LEVEL
EON
Using the sleep timer
The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a
specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without
worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use
the remote control to set the sleep timer.
STANDARD ADV SURR
AUTO/
DIRECT
PGM
TV
SOURCE
VOL
STANDARD ADV SURR
BD MENU
RCV
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
DIMMER
AUDIO
TV
CH
STEREO/
A.L.C.
PGM
BD MENU
SR+
SBch
SOURCE
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
RCV
DIMMER
AUDIO
MCACC
VOL
1 Select the source you want to record.
Use the input source buttons (or INPUT SELECT).
• If necessary, set the operation selector switch to RCV,
then press SIGNAL SEL to select the input signal
corresponding to the source component (see
Choosing the input signal on page 38 for more on
this).
2 Prepare the source you want to record.
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.
3 Prepare the recorder.
Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording
device and set the recording levels.
Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if
you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set
the audio recording level automatically—check the
component’s instruction manual if you’re unsure.
CH
SR+
VOL
SBch
MCACC
VOL
DISP
A.ATT
GENRE HDMI OUT
• Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then press
SLEEP repeatedly to set the sleep time.
30 min
60 min
Off
90 min
• You can check the remaining sleep time at any time
by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will
cycle through the sleep options again.2
Dimming the display
You can choose between four brightness levels for the
front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the
display automatically brightens for a few seconds.
4 Start recording, then start playback of the source
component.
AUTO/
DIRECT
STEREO/
A.L.C.
STANDARD ADV SURR
PGM
BD MENU
TV
Reducing the level of an analog signal
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog
signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find
that the OVER indicator lights often or you can hear
distortion in the sound.1
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
SR+
SBch
DIMMER
SOURCE
CH
VOL
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
RCV
SR+
SBch
DIMMER
AUDIO
MCACC
VOL
DISP
A.ATT
GENRE HDMI OUT
TVCONTROL
• Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then press
DIMMER repeatedly to change the brightness of the
front panel display.
AUDIO
MCACC
DISP
TV
CH
SOURCE
VOL
A.ATT
RCV
D.ACCESS
GENRE HDMI OUT
CLASS
CH
ENTER
VOL
CLR
• Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then press
A.ATT to switch the input attenuator on or off.
Note
1 The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct (ANALOG DIRECT) modes.
2 You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the receiver.
97
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 98 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
13
Using other functions
2 When you’re finished, press STATUS again to
switch off the display.
Switching the HDMI output
SC-LX81 only
Set which terminal to use when outputting video and
audio signals from the HDMI output terminals (HDMI
OUT1, HDMI OUT2 or HDMI OUT ALL).
The HDMI OUT1 terminal is compatible with the HDMI
control function.
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
SR+
SBch
DIMMER
AUDIO
MCACC
DISP
TV
SOURCE
CH
A.ATT
RCV
GENRE HDMI OUT
D.ACCESS
VOL
CLASS
VOL
CH
ENTER
Resetting the system
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to
the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.
Set MULTI-ZONE to OFF.
1
2 While holding down HOME MENU on the front
panel, press  STANDBY/ON.
The display shows RESET  NO .
3
CLR
• Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then press
HDMI OUT.
Please wait a while when Please wait ... is displayed.
The output switches among HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2
and HDMI OUT ALL each time the button is pressed.1
Checking your system settings
Switch the receiver into standby.
Press ENTER on the front panel.
4 Select ‘RESET’ using /, then press ENTER on
the front panel.
The display shows RESET? OK.
5 Press ENTER to confirm.
OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver
has been reset to the factory default settings.
• Note that all settings will be saved, even if the
receiver is unplugged.
Use the status display screen to check your current
settings for features such as surround back channel
processing and your current MCACC preset.
PTY
SEARCH
TV
SOURCE
CH
VOL
RETURN
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
STATUS
RCV
THX
TUNE
PHASE CTRL
MPX
CH LEVEL
EON
VOL
AUTO/
DIRECT
STEREO/
A.L.C.
STANDARD ADV SURR
PGM
TVCONTROL
BD MENU
1 Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then press
STATUS to check the system settings.
These appear on the front panel display.2
The front panel display shows each of the following
settings for two seconds each:
Input source
↓
Surround Back Processing
↓
MCACC preset
↓
ZONE 2 input
↓
ZONE 3 input
↓
HDMI Control
↓
HDMI OUT
Note
1 • Synchronized amp mode on page 89 is canceled when the HDMI output is switched. If you wish to use the synchronized amp mode, switch
to HDMI OUT1, then select the synchronized amp mode on the flat panel TV using the flat panel TV’s remote control.
• When the power is turned off then back on after switching the HDMI output, the input is set to a setting between HDMI1 and HDMI3, or BD.
2 If the Pure Direct mode is switched on, some settings above will show OFF, even though they are on.
98
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 99 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Using other functions
13
Default system settings
Setting
Setting
Default
Digital Video Conversion
ON
SPEAKERS
A
Surround Back System
Normal
Speaker System
Front
SMALL
Center
SMALL
Surr
SMALL
SB
SMALLx2
SW
YES
Crossover
80 Hz
X-Curve
OFF
THX Audio Setting
1.2 m<
DIMMER
brightest
Inputs
See Input function default and possible settings on page 91.
Neo:6 Options
Center Image
Neo:6 MUSIC: 3
Neo:6 CINEMA:
10
All Inputs
Listening Mode
(2 ch)
AUTO
SURROUND
Listening Mode
(x ch)
AUTO
SURROUND
Listening Mode
(HP)
STEREO
See also Setting the Audio options on page 94 for other default
DSP settings.
MCACC
MCACC Position Memory
M1: MEMORY 1
Channel Level (M1 to M6)
0.0 dB
Speaker Distance (M1 to M6)
Standing Wave
(M1 to M6)
MULTI-ZONE
Zone 2/3 Volume Level
Variable
Zone 2/3 Volume
–60 dB
HDMI
HDMI Audio
Amp
HDMI output
HDMI OUT ALL
HDMI Control
ON
Default
EQ Data (M1 to M6)
3.00 m
Standing Wave
On/Off
ON
ATT
0.0 dB
SWch Wide Trim
0.0 dB
All channels/bands 0.0 dB
EQ Wide Trim
(M1 to M6)
0.0 dB
SR+
SR+ Control On/Off
OFF
SR+ Volume Control On/Off
OFF
Monitor Out
OFF
DSP
Surround back channel Processing
ON
Phase Control
ON
Full Band Phase Control
OFF
Sound Retriever
OFF
Sound Delay
0.0 frame
Dual Mono
CH1
DRC
AUTO
SACD Gain
0 dB
LFE Attenuate
0 dB
Auto delay
OFF
Digital Safety
OFF
Effect Level
2 PL II Music
Options
ExtendedStereo
90
Other modes
50
Center Width
3
Dimension
0
Panorama
OFF
99
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 100 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Controlling the rest of your system
14
Chapter 14:
Controlling the rest of your system
Setting the remote to control other
components
Most components can be assigned to one of the input
source buttons (such as DVD or CD) using the
component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the
remote.
However, there are cases where only certain functions
may be controllable after assigning the proper preset
code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote
control will not work for the model that you are using.
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the
component you want to control, you can still teach the
remote individual commands from another remote
control (see Programming signals from other remote
controls below).
Note
• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing
MULTI OPERATION. To go back a step, press
RETURN.
• After one minute of inactivity, the remote
automatically exits the operation.
Selecting preset codes directly
RECEIVER
MAIN
ZONE2
SOURCE
3
MULTI
OPERATION
DVD
BD
DVR1
TV
DVR1
DVR2
VIDEO1
VIDEO2
VIDEO3
DVR2
TV
CD-R
PHONO
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
TV
CH
SOURCE
RCV
VOL
TV CONTROL
INPUT
MUTE
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
TUNE +
3 Press the input source button for the component
you want to control, then press ENTER.
When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL, set the
operation selector switch to TV here.
The LCD on the remote displays the component you want
to control (for example DVD or TV).1
4 Use / to select the first letter of the brand name
of your component, then press ENTER.
This should be the manufacturer’s name (for example, P
for Pioneer).
5 Use / to select the manufacturer’s name from
the list, then press ENTER.
6 Use / to select the proper code from the list,
then try using this remote with your component.
The code should start with the component type (for
example, DVD 020). If there is more than one, start with
the first one.2
To try out the remote control, switch the component on or
off (into standby) by pressing SOURCE. If it doesn’t
seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there
is one).
• If you can’t find or properly enter a preset code, you
can still teach the remote individual commands from
another remote control (see Programming signals
from other remote controls below).
7 If your component is controlled successfully, press
ENTER to confirm.
The remote LCD display shows OK.
VOL
MUTE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TOOLS
INPUT SELECT
HDMI
TUNER
TOP MENU
BAND
ST
MENU
T.EDIT
ENTER
PTY
SEARCH
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
STATUS
ST +
RETURN
TUNE
PHASE CTRL
CH LEVEL
1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME
MENU.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2
Use / to select PRESET, then press ENTER.
Note
1 You can’t assign TUNER or HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
2 • When using a Pioneer HDD recorder, please select PIONEER DVR 487, 488, 489 or 493.
• When using a Pioneer flat screen TV released prior to summer 2005, please select preset codes 637 or 660.
100
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 101 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Controlling the rest of your system
14
Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be
learned from other remote controls. The buttons
available are shown below:
Programming signals from other
remote controls
If the preset code for your component is not available, or
the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you
can program signals from the remote control of another
component. This can also be used to program additional
operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after
assigning a preset code.1
RECEIVER MAIN
SOURCE
ZONE2
DVD
3
MULTI
OPERATION
BD
DVR1
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
TUNE +
MENU
T.EDIT
DVR2
ST
VIDEO1
VIDEO2
VIDEO3
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
CD-R
TV
PHONO
INPUT SELECT
HDMI
ENTER
PTY
SEARCH
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
STATUS
TUNE
PHASE CTRL
THX
AUTO/
DIRECT
MPX
STEREO/
A.L.C.
STANDARD ADV SURR
BD MENU
TV
SOURCE
RCV
SR+
SBch
DIMMER
AUDIO
MCACC
DISP
CH
VOL
VOL
A.ATT
D.ACCESS
4 Point the two remote controls towards each other,
then press the button that will be doing the learning on
this receiver’s remote control.
PRES KEY lights to indicate the remote is ready to accept
a signal.
CH LEVEL
EON
PGM
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
3 Press the input source button for the component
you want to control, then press ENTER.
PRES KEY blinks in the LCD display.2
ST +
RETURN
TUNER
1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME
MENU.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2 Use / to select LEARNING, then press ENTER.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component
you want to control (for example DVD or TV).
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TOOLS
TOP MENU
BAND
TV CONTROL
INPUT
MUTE
AUDIO
GENRE HDMI OUT
CLASS
CH
ENTER
MUTE
CLR
VIDEO
6 To program additional signals for the current
component repeat steps 4 and 5.
To program signals for another component, exit and
repeat steps 1 through 5.
7 Press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of
seconds to exit and store the operation(s).
VOL
MUTE
RCV
VOL
SOURCE
TV
CH
TV CONTROL
INPUT
MUTE
DVR2
DVR1
PHONO
CD-R
SOURCE
INPUT SELECT
TUNER
HDMI
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
TV
VIDEO3
BD
VIDEO2
ZONE2
DVD
VIDEO1
RECEIVER MAIN
3 cm to 5 cm
3
MULTI
OPERATION
• The remote controls should be 3 cm to 5 cm apart.
5 Press the corresponding button on the other
remote control that is sending (teaching) the signal to
this receiver’s remote control.
For example, if you want to learn the playback control
signal, press and hold  briefly. The LCD display will
show OK if the operation has been learned.3
If for some reasons the operation hasn’t been learned the
LCD will display ERROR briefly, and then display PRES
KEY again. If this happens, keep pressing the (teaching)
button as you vary the distance between the two remotes,
until the LCD display shows OK.4
Erasing one of the remote control
button settings
This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and
restores the button to the factory default.
1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME
MENU.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2 Use / to select ERASE, then press ENTER.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component
corresponding to the button setting to be erased.
3 Press the input source button corresponding to the
command to be erased, then press ENTER.
The LCD display flashes PRES KEY.
4 Press and hold the button to be erased for two
seconds.
The LCD display shows OK or NO CODE to confirm the
button has been erased.
Note
1 The remote can store about 200 preset codes (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only).
2 • You can’t assign TUNER or HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
• The TV CONTROL buttons (TV, TV VOL +/–, TV CH +/–, MUTE and INPUT) can only be learned after the operation selection switch is set
to TV.
3 Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal.
4 • Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or
farther apart.
• If the remote LCD shows FULL, it means the memory is full. See Erasing one of the remote control button settings above to erase a
programmed button you’re not using to free up more memory (note that some signals may take more memory than others).
101
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 102 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Controlling the rest of your system
14
5
Repeat step 4 to erase other buttons.
6 Press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of
seconds when you’re done.
Resetting the remote control presets
This will erase all preset remote control preset codes and
programmed buttons.1
1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME
MENU.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2 Use / to select RESET, then press ENTER.
RESET flashes in the LCD display.
3 Press and hold ENTER for about two seconds.
The LCD shows OK to confirm the remote presets have
been erased.
Confirming preset codes
Use this feature to check which preset code is assigned
to an input source button.
1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME
MENU.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2 Use / to select READ ID, then press ENTER.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the input source
button you want to check.
3 Press the button of the component for which you
want to check the preset code, then press ENTER.
The brand name and preset code appears in the display
for three seconds.
Renaming input source names
You can customize the names that appear on the remote
LCD when you select an input source (for example, you
could change the name of DVR 1 to HDD/DVR).
1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME
MENU.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
3 Press the input source button you want to rename
then press ENTER.
4 Use / to select NAME EDT, then press ENTER.
To reset the button to its original (default) name, select
NAME RST above.
5 Edit the name of the input source in the remote
control LCD, pressing ENTER when you’re finished.
Use / to change the character and / to move
forward/back a position. The name can be up to eight
characters (the possible characters are listed below).
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123456789 \ / * + – [space]
Direct function
• Default setting: ON
You can use the direct function feature to control one
component using the remote control while at the same
time, using your receiver to playback a different
component. This could let you, for example, use the
remote control to set up and listen to a CD on the
receiver, and then use the remote control to rewind a
tape in your VCR while you continue to listen to your CD
player.
When direct function is on, any component you select
(using the input source buttons) will be selected by both
the receiver and the remote control. When you turn direct
function off, you can operate the remote control without
affecting the receiver.
1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME
MENU.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2 Use / to select DIRECT F, then press ENTER.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the
input source you want to control.
3 Press the input source button for the component
you want to control, then press ENTER.
4 Use / to switch direct function ON or OFF, then
press ENTER.
The LCD shows OK to confirm the setting.
2 Use / to select RENAME, then press ENTER.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the
input source you want to rename.
Note
1 When Selecting preset codes directly on page 100 are set, all the signals learned in the input source buttons are cleared. This function is
convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input source buttons.
102
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 103 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Controlling the rest of your system
Multi Operation and System Off
The Multi Operation feature allows you to program a
series of up to 5 commands for the components in your
system. For example, you could turn on your TV, turn on
your DVD player and start playing the loaded DVD using
only two buttons on the remote control.
Similar to multi operations, System Off allows you to use
one button to stop and switch off a series of components
in your system at the same time.1
Programming a multi-operation or a
shutdown sequence
Set the remote control operation mode selector switch to
RCV when you want to program this receiver’s
operations, to SOURCE when you want to program
operations of other components.
14
6 If necessary, press the input source button for the
component whose command you want to input.
This is only necessary if the command is for a new
component (input source).
7 Select the button for the command you want to
input.
The following remote control commands can be selected:
RECEIVER
MAIN
ZONE2
MAIN
ZONE2
SOURCE
3
MULTI
OPERATION
DVD
BD
DVR1
TV
DVR1
DVR2
VIDEO1
VIDEO2
VIDEO3
DVR2
TV
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
PHONO
INPUT SELECT
HDMI
TUNER
MUTE
TUNE +
TUNE +
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TOOLS
TOP MENU
BAND
DVD
BD
DVR1
DVR2
VIDEO2
VIDEO3
TV
CD-R
PHONO
MENU
T.EDIT
ST
ENTER
PTY
SEARCH
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
STATUS
ST +
RETURN
TUNE
PHASE CTRL
CH LEVEL
INPUT SELECT
HDMI
TUNER
THX
AUTO/
DIRECT
MPX
STEREO/
A.L.C.
EON
STANDARD ADV SURR
PGM
BD MENU
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP
SOURCE
SR+
CH
VOL
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TOOLS
SBch
DIMMER
AUDIO
MCACC
DISP
RCV
VOL
D.ACCESS
GENRE HDMI OUT
CLASS
CH
ENTER
CLR
TOP MENU
BAND
ST
CD-R
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
A.ATT
TV CONTROL
INPUT
MUTE
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
3
MULTI
OPERATION
VIDEO1
TV
RECEIVER
SOURCE
ENTER
PTY
SEARCH
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
STATUS
THX
MENU
T.EDIT
TV CONTROL
INPUT
MUTE
ST +
AUDIO
RETURN
TUNE
PHASE CTRL
MPX
CH LEVEL
EON
1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME
MENU.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2 Use / to select MULTI OP or SYS OFF from the
menu and press ENTER.
If you selected Multi Operation (MULTI OP), the LCD on
the remote prompts you for an input source button.
If you selected System Off (SYS OFF), go to step 4.
3 Press the input source button for the component
that will start the multi-operation, then press ENTER.
For example, if you want to start the sequence by
switching on your DVD player, press DVD.
4 Use / to select CODE EDT, then press ENTER.
To erase any previously stored multi-operations (or
shutdown sequences) select CODE ERS above.
MUTE
VIDEO
• You don’t need to program the receiver to switch on
or off. This is done automatically.
With Pioneer components, you don’t need to:
• program the power to switch off in a shutdown
sequence (except DVD recorders);
• program the power to switch on if it’s the source
component selected in step 3;
• program a Pioneer TV or monitor to switch on if the
input function (selected in step 2) has video input
terminals;
These take priority in multi operations (not shutdown).
8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 to program a sequence of up to
five commands.
9 When you’re finished, use / to select EXIT from
the menu and press ENTER.
You will return to the remote control Setup menu. Select
* EXIT * again to exit.
5 Use / to select a command in the sequence, then
press ENTER.
If this is the first command in the sequence, select 1ST
CODE. Otherwise, simply choose the next command in
the sequence. PRES KEY flashes after you press ENTER.
Note
1 • Before Multi Operation and System Off will work correctly, you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components (see
Setting the remote to control other components on page 100 for more on this).
• Some units may take some time to power up, in which case multiple operations may not be possible.
• Power on and off commands only work with components that have a standby mode.
103
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 104 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
14
Controlling the rest of your system
Using multi operations
You can start multi operations with the receiver switched
on, or in standby.
RECEIVER
MAIN
ZONE2
SOURCE
3
MULTI
OPERATION
DVD
BD
DVR1
VIDEO1
VIDEO2
VIDEO3
TV
CD-R
PHONO
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
DVR2
INPUT SELECT
1 Press MULTI OPERATION.
MULTI OP flashes in the display.
2 Press an input source button that has been set up
with a multi operation.
The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the
programmed multi operation is performed automatically.
Button(s)
Function
Components
TV
CONTROL
CH +/–
Selects channels.
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV
TV
CONTROL
VOL +/–
Adjust the TV volume.
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV
TV
CONTROL
MUTE
Mute the volume.
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV
SOURCE Switches the TV or CATV
between standby and on.
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV

Use to choose the ‘A’
commands on a Satellite TV
menu.
Satellite TV

Use to choose the RED/B
Satellite TV/TV
commands on a Satellite TV/TV
menu.

Use to choose the CYAN/E
Satellite TV/TV
commands on a Satellite TV/TV
menu.

Use to choose the GREEN/C
Satellite TV/TV
commands on a Satellite TV/TV
menu.

Use to choose the YELLOW/D
Satellite TV/TV
commands on a Satellite TV/TV
menu.
AUDIO
Use to switch audio tracks.
TOOLS
Use to display the TOOLS menu TV
on the flat screen TV.
EXIT
Use to return to the normal
screen in one step.
TV
RETURN
Use to select RETURN or EXIT.
Satellite TV/TV
Number
buttons
Use to select a specific TV
channel.
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV
D.ACCESS
Use to add a decimal point
when selecting a TV channel.
Satellite TV/TV
ENTER/
CLASS
Use to enter a channel.
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV
MENU
Select the menu screen.
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV
Using System off
RECEIVER
MAIN
ZONE2
SOURCE
3
MULTI
OPERATION
DVD
BD
DVR1
DVR2
VIDEO1
VIDEO2
VIDEO3
TV
CD-R
PHONO
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
CD
1 Press MULTI OPERATION.
MULTI OP flashes in the display.
2 Press SOURCE.
The command sequence you programmed will run, then
all Pioneer components will switch off1, followed by this
receiver.
Controls for TVs
This remote control can control components after
entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the
commands (see Setting the remote to control other
components on page 100 for more on this). Set the
operation selector switch to SOURCE, then press the
other device operation button of the device you want to
operate.
• TV CONTROL on the remote control are dedicated to
control the TV assigned to the TV operation selector
switch.
Button(s)
Function
Components
TV
CONTROL

Press to switch the component Cable TV/
assigned to the TV operation
Satellite TV/TV
selector switch on or off.
TV
CONTROL
INPUT
Switches the TV input. (Not
possible with all models.)
Satellite TV/TV
///
Select, adjust and navigate
 & ENTER items on the menu screen.
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV
TOP MENU Use to select EXIT.
TV
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV
Note
1 In order to avoid accidently switching off a DVD recorder that is currently recording, no DVD recorder power off codes are sent.
104
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 105 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Controlling the rest of your system
Controls for other components
This remote control can control these components after
entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the
commands (see Setting the remote to control other
components on page 100 for more on this). Set the
operation selector switch to SOURCE, then press the
other device operation button of the device you want to
operate.
Button(s)
Function
SOURCE Press to switch the component
between standby and on.




Components
CD/MD/CD-R/
DVD/LD/BD/
DVR player/
VCR/Cassette
deck
Press to return to the start of the CD/MD/CD-R/
current track or chapter.
DVD/LD/BD
player
Repeated presses skips to the
start of previous tracks or
chapters.
14
Button(s)
Function
Components
D.ACCESS
Selects tracks higher than 10.
VCR/CD/MD/
(For example, press +10, then 3 CD-R/LD player
to select track 13.)
ENTER/
CLASS
Use as the ENTER button.
VCR/DVD/BD
player
Displays the setup screen for
DVR players.
DVR player
Changes sides of the LD.
LD player
TOP MENU Displays the disc ‘top’ menu of a DVD/BD/DVR
DVD player.
player
MENU
Displays menus concerning the DVD/BD/DVR
player
current DVD or DVR you are
using.

Pauses the tape.

Stops the tape.
Cassette deck
ENTER
Starts playback.
Cassette deck
/
Fast rewinds/fast forwards the
tape.
Cassette deck
///
Navigates DVD menu/options.
 & ENTER
DVD/BD/DVR
player
CH +/–
Selects channels.
VCR/DVD/DVR
player
Changes the audio language or DVD/BD/DVR
channel.
player
Cassette deck
Press to advance to the start of
the next track or chapter.
Repeated presses skips to the
start of following tracks or
chapters.
CD/MD/CD-R/
DVD/LD/BD
player
Pause playback or recording.
CD/MD/CD-R/
DVD/LD/BD/
DVR player/
VCR/Cassette
deck
AUDIO
STANDARD Switches to the VCR controls
when using a VCR/DVD/HDD
recorder.
VCR/DVD/DVR
player
CD/MD/CD-R/
DVD/LD/BD/
DVR player/
VCR/Cassette
deck
DISP
Press to display information.
DVD/BD/DVR
player
AUTO/
DIRECT
Switches to the hard disk
controls when using a DVD/
HDD recorder.
DVR player
STEREO
Switches to the DVD controls
when using a DVD/HDD
recorder.
DVR player
HOME
MENU
Displays the HOME MENU.
DVD/BD/DVR
player
CLR
Use as the CLEAR button.
DVD/BD player
Start playback.

Hold down for fast forward
playback.
CD/MD/CD-R/
DVD/LD/BD/
DVR player/
VCR/Cassette
deck

Hold down for fast reverse
playback.
CD/MD/CD-R/
DVD/LD/BD/
DVR player/
VCR/Cassette
deck

Stops playback.
CD/MD/CD-R/
DVD/LD/BD/
DVR player/
VCR/Cassette
deck
Number
buttons
Directly access tracks on a
program source.
CD/MD/CD-R/
LD/BD player/
VCR
Use the number buttons to
navigate the on-screen display.
DVD player
Selects channels.
DVR/VCR
Select chapters higher than 10. LD/DVR player
105
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 106 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
14
Controlling the rest of your system
Operating other Pioneer components
with this unit’s sensor
Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks
which can be used to link components together so that
you can use just the remote sensor of one component.
When you use a remote control, the control signal is
passed along the chain to the appropriate component.1
Important
• Note that if you use this feature, make sure that you
also have at least one set of analog audio, video or
HDMI jacks connected to another component for
grounding purposes.
1 Decide which component you want to use the
remote sensor of.
When you want to control any component in the chain,
this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the
corresponding remote control.
2 Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component
to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the
connection.
12 V
TRIGGER
LAN (10/100)
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD)
HDMI
BD
IN
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50mA
MAX)
1
(DVD)
2
CONTROL
PR
IN
OUT
IN 2 (CD)
IN 3 (DVR2)
IR
CE
SOUR
MAIN
IVER
RECE
IN
1
3
2
TION
MULTI
DVR
OPERA
1
TV
DVR
3
O
BD
VIDEO
PHON
2
CD-R SELECT
VIDEO
INPUT
1
CD
VIDEO
MEDIAY
HOMEGALLER
TUNER
I
HDM
ZONE2
DVD
IN 1
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
E RCV
VOL
SOURC
TV
VOL
MUTE
CH
TV
IN
2
IN 2
(DVR1)
IN
2
SIG
G
OL
MUTE
CONTR
+
TUNE
VIDEOETER
PARAM
TOOLS
MENU
T.EDIT
ST
INPUT
AUDIOETER EXIT
PARAM
+
RETURN
R
ENTE
MENU
TOPBAND
CH
LEVEL
ST
PTY
SEARCH
TUNE CTRL
HOME
MENU
CTRL S
iPodSTATU
PHASE
SURR
EON
MPX
/
THX
ADV
ARD
STAND
AUDIO
STEREO
A.L.C.
AUTO/
DIRECT
BD
R
MENU
PGM
DIMME
DISP
SLEEP
MCACC
L SEL
OUT
SBch
SIGNA
HDMI
CH
SR+
GENRE
OUT
A.ATT
CLASS
ENTER
SS
D.ACCE
CLR
IN 3
(VIDEO1)
CONTROL
IN
3
IN
IN 4
(CD-R)
OUT
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 3 ASSIGNABLE
OUT
1
ZONE3/
SOURCE
OUT
(HDMI
CTRL)
OUT
2
SOURCE
OUT
RS-232C
CONTROL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
IN
OUT
3 Continue the chain in the same way for as many
components as you have.
Note
1 • If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, see Setting the remote to control other components on
page 100.
• If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this unit using the
remote sensor.
• See Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat screen TV on page 68 if you are connecting a Pioneer flat screen TV.
106
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 107 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Additional information
15
Chapter 15:
Additional information
Step 1: Speaker layout and distance adjustment
Speaker Setting Guide
In order to achieve an even better surround effect, it is
important to accurately position the speakers and make
their volume and tone characteristics uniform so as to
finely focus the multi-channel sound.
The three major elements in positioning the speakers are
distance, angle and orientation (the direction in which
the speakers are pointing).
Distance: The distance of all the speakers should be
equal.
Angle: The speakers should be placed at the angles
shown in Fig. 1 and be horizontally symmetrical.
Orientation: The orientation should be horizontally
symmetrical.
In most homes, however, it is not possible to achieve this
environment. For the distance, on this receiver it is
possible to automatically correct the speaker distance
electrically to a precision of 1 cm using the Auto MCACC
Setup function (page 9). For the volume and sound
quality as well, accurate sound field correction using the
equalizer and speaker phase characteristic correction
using the Full Band Phase Control function (page 11)
together make it possible to achieve the ideal listening
environment.
Here we consider mainly the two elements of angle and
orientation, based on the ITU-R recommended 5.1channel layout shown in Fig. 1.
Fig. 1
5.1-channel speaker layout recommended
by the ITU-R (ITU-R BS.775-1)
60°
100°
to
120°
Listening
position
This type of setup is based on the recommendations
of the ITU-R (International Telecommunication Union
– Radiocommunication Sector), an international
organization specialized in the field of electric
communications.
Adjust the main speakers to the angles shown in Fig. 1.
Use speaker stands or the like to make sure the speakers
are steady, and leave at least 10 cm from the surrounding
walls. Position the speakers attentively so that the
speakers on the left and right are at equal angles from the
listening position (center of the adjustments). (We
recommend using cords, etc., when adjusting the
layout.) Ideally all the speakers should be equidistant
from the listening position.
Tip
• If the speakers cannot be set at equal distances (on a
circle), use the Auto MCACC Setup speaker distance
correction and Fine Speaker Distance functions to
make them equalize the distance artificially.
Step 2: Adjusting the speaker height
Adjust the heights (angles) of the different speakers.
Adjust so that the front speaker units reproducing midand high frequencies is roughly at the height of the ears.
If the center speaker cannot be set at the same height as
the front speakers, adjust its angle of elevation to point it
to the listening position.
Set surround speaker 1 so that it is not under the height
of the ears.
Step 3: Adjusting the speaker orientation
If the left and right speakers are not pointing in the same
direction, the tone will not be the same on the right and
left, and as a result the sound field will not be reproduced
properly. However, if all the speakers are pointed towards
the listening position, the sound field will seem cramped.
Testing by the Pioneer Multi-channel Research Group
has shown that a good sense of sound positioning can be
achieved by pointing all the speakers towards an area
30 cm to 80 cm behind the listening position (between
the surround speakers and the listening position).
However, the sense of sound positioning can differ
according to the conditions in the room and the speakers
being used. In smaller environments in particular (when
the front speakers are close to the listening position),
with this method the speakers will be pointed too inward.
We suggest you use this example of installation as
reference when trying out different installation methods.
107
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 108 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
15
Additional information
Step 4: Positioning and adjusting the subwoofer
Tip
• When adjusting the orientation of the speakers, turn
the speakers with the center of the speakers’ baffle
surfaces as the axis so that the speakers’ center
positions do not change.
Fig. 2
C
L
R
SL
SR
Placing the subwoofer between the center and front
speakers makes even music sources sound more natural
(If there is only one subwoofer, it doesn’t matter if it is
placed on the left or right side). The low bass sound
output from the subwoofer is not directional and there is
no need to adjust the height. Normally the subwoofer is
placed on the floor. Put it in a position at which it will not
cancel out the bass sound output from the other
speakers. Also note that placing it near a wall may result
in sympathetic vibrations with the building that could
excessively amplify the bass sound.
If the subwoofer must be installed near a wall, place it at
an angle so that it is not parallel to the wall surface. This
can help reduce any sympathetic vibrations, but
depending on the shape of the room this could result in
standing waves. However, even if standing waves are
generated, their influence on the sound quality can be
prevented using the Auto MCACC’s standing wave
control function (page 49).
Tip
The central axes converge 30 cm to 80 cm
behind the listening position.
Fig. 3
• Setting the subwoofer with the line connecting the
woofer (middle and low frequency reproduction
units) sections of the center and front speakers
parallel to the subwoofer’s front surface achieves a
more natural, powerful bass sound.
Fig. 4
SW
Center of rotation
Rotation
Examples of recommended speaker layouts based on the
ITU-R (Fig.1) for systems with more than 5.1 channels
C
R
Set the subwoofer parallel to the
connecting line.
(Note that it will be too close if it is
placed directly on the line.)
• For 7.1-channel systems
L
C
L
Step 5: Default settings with the Auto MCACC
Setup (auto sound field correction) function
R
It is more effective to perform the Auto MCACC Setup
(page 9) procedure once the adjustments described
above have been completed.
Tip
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
The central axes converge 30 cm to 80 cm
behind the listening position.
108
En
• The distance to the subwoofer may be slightly larger
than the distance actually measured with a tape
measure, etc. This is because this distance is
corrected for electric delay, and is not a problem.
SCLX81_71.book Page 109 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Additional information
15
Positional relationship between speakers
and monitor
Position of front speakers and monitor
The front speakers should be as equidistant as possible
to the monitor.
L
TV
R
45° to 60°
Position of center speaker and monitor
Since mostly dialogs are output from the center speaker,
keeping the center speaker as close as possible to the
screen makes the overall sound more natural. For TVs
using Braun tubes, however, when installing the center
speaker on the floor, adjust its angle of elevation to point
it towards the listening position.
Installation on floor
(Diagram as seen
from the side)
Monitor
• If the center speaker is not of the shielded type, install
it away from the TV.
• When installing the center speaker on top of the
monitor, place it facing slightly downwards towards
the listening position.
109
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 110 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
15
Additional information
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks
listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.
Note
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug
from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
Power
Symptom
Remedy
The power does not turn on.
• Make sure that the power cable is plugged in to an active power outlet.
• Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.
The receiver suddenly switches • Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of
off or the PHASE CONTROL
wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.
indicator blinks.
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized
independent service company.
During loud playback the
power suddenly switches off.
• Turn down the volume.
• Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 47.
• Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down HOME MENU on the front panel, press
 STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use / to select D.SAFETY OFF,
and then use / to select 1 or 2 (select D.SAFETY OFF to deactivate this feature). If the power
switches off even with 2 switched on, turn down the volume. With 1 or 2 on, some features may be
unavailable.
The unit does not respond
• Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.
when the buttons are pressed. • Try disconnecting the power cable, then connect again.
AMP ERR blinks in the display, • The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Contact a Pioneer
then the power automatically authorized independent service company for help.
switches off. The MCACC
blinks and the power does not
turn on.
FAN STOP blinks in the
display, then the power
automatically switches off and
DIGITAL VIDEO SCALER
indicator blinks.
• Something is obstructing the fan. Remove the obstruction and try switching the receiver back on.
If the fan is still not working, or you can’t remove the object, unplug the receiver from the wall and
call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.
• The fan is malfunctioning. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized
independent service company.
OVERHEAT or AMP
• Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on.
OVERHEAT flashes, the power • Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again.
turns off, and the blue indicator
at the center of the receiver
flashes.
Display blinks 12V TRG ERR.
110
En
• An error has arisen in the 12 V trigger jacks. Reconnect accurately then turn the power back on.
SCLX81_71.book Page 111 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Additional information
15
No sound
Symptom
Remedy
No sound is output when an
• Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press SPEAKERS).
input source is selected.
• Make sure the correct input source is selected.
No sound output from the front • Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.
speakers.
• Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL). Note that when PCM is
selected, you won’t be able to hear any other signal format.
• Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your equipment on
page 14).
• Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page 25).
No sound from the surround or • Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t selected;
center speakers.
select one of the surround listening modes (see Listening in surround sound on page 35).
• Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 57).
• Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 58).
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 25).
No sound from surround back • Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL (see Speaker Setting on
speakers.
page 57).
• Make sure surround back processing is set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel
processing on page 39).
• If the source is Dolby Surround EX or DTS ES with no flag to indicate 6.1 compatibility, then with
surround back processing set to SBch Auto, there will be no sound from the surround back
speakers. In this case, set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 39).
• If the source does not have 6.1 playback channels, make sure that surround back processing is set
to SBch ON and a surround mode is selected (see Listening in surround sound on page 35).
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 25). If only one surround
back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.
No sound from subwoofer.
• Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.
• If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.
• Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 57).
• The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteristics of
your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 57).
• If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings
to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on
page 57).
• Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or a very quiet setting (see Setting the Audio options
on page 94).
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 58).
No sound from one speaker.
• Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 25).
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 58).
• Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 57).
• The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect listening
mode, you may be able to create the missing channel (see Listening in surround sound on page 35).
Sound is produced from
analog components, but not
from digital ones (DVD, LD,
CD-ROM etc.).
• Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 38).
• Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected
to (see The Input Setup menu on page 90).
• Check the digital output settings on the source component.
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected. Select any other input source.
No sound is output or a noise is • Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.
output when Dolby Digital/DTS • Check the digital output settings of your DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set
software is played back.
to On.
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.
111
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 112 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
15
Additional information
Symptom
Remedy
No sound when using the
HOME MENU or STATUS
menu.
• If the HDMI input source is selected, sound is muted until exiting either menu.
• If sound is muted in the sub zone (ZONE 2), it will be restored after exiting the HOME MENU.
Other audio problems
Symptom
Remedy
Broadcast stations cannot be
selected automatically, or
there is considerable noise in
radio broadcasts.
For FM broadcasts
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall, etc.
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 28).
For AM broadcasts
• Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 28).
• Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluorescent light, motor,
etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are selected (see Selecting the multichannel analog
A multichannel DVD source
appears to be downmixed to 2 inputs on page 61).
channels during playback.
Noise is output when scanning • This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player alters the digital
a DTS CD.
information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume when
scanning.
When playing a DTS format LD • Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 38).
there is audible noise on the
soundtrack.
Can’t record audio.
• You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog recording from an
analog source.
• For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.
• Check that the OUT jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks (see Connecting
analog audio sources on page 24).
Subwoofer output is very low.
• To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL (see
Speaker Setting on page 57).
Everything seems to be set up • The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on the
correctly, but the playback
receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the
sound is odd.
speakers on page 25).
The PHASE CONTROL feature • If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is
doesn’t seem to have an
set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or
audible effect.
depending on the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).
• Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker Distance on
page 59).
Noise or hum can be heard
even when there is no sound
being input.
• Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source
are not causing interference.
There seems to be a time lag
• See Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 9 to
between the speakers and the set up your system again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in the
output of the subwoofer.
subwoofer output).
Can’t use the SR+ features.
• Make sure that HDMI Control is set to OFF (see Setting the HDMI Control mode on page 88).
The maximum volume
• This is not a malfunction. If the levels in Channel Level on page 58 have been adjusted, the
available (shown in the front
maximum volume will change accordingly.
panel display) is lower than the
+12dB maximum.
112
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 113 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Additional information
15
Video
Symptom
Remedy
No image is output when an
input is selected.
• Check the video connections of the source component (see page 21).
• For HDMI, or when digital video conversion is set to OFF and a TV and another component are
connected with different cords (in Setting the Video options on page 96), you must connect your TV
to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.
• Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component video,
HDMI or S-Video cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 90).
• Check the video output settings of the source component.
• Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.
• Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. If
adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 96) and/or the
resolution settings on your component or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video
Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 96) OFF.
Can’t record video.
• Check that the source is not copy-protected.
• The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type of video
cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to record) to
this receiver.
Noisy, intermittent, or distorted • Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the
picture.
video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may
also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect
the source and display device using the same type of connection (component, S-Video or
composite), then start playback again.
ZONE2 video convert function
does not work.
• Conversion is not possible when the video input signal is a component signal. Either use the
composite or S-Video terminal, or connect to the TV using a component cable.
• Turn the video convert function off and connect the source component and monitor with the same
type of cord.
Settings
Symptom
Remedy
The Auto MCACC Setup
continually shows an error.
• The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible (see
also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 10). If the noise level cannot be kept low
enough, you will have to set up the surround sound manually (page 56).
• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single)
terminals.
• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel, not the
surround back channel.
• Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.
• There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-conditioner, motor, etc.
After using the Auto MCACC
Setup, the speaker size setting Switch off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.
is incorrect.
• Depending on a number of factors (room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some
cases. Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 57, and use the ALL (Keep
SP System) option for the Auto MCACC menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 45 if this is a
recurring problem.
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker
Distance setting (page 48)
properly.
• Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are
matched up properly).
The display shows KEY LOCK
ON when you try to make
settings.
• With the receiver in standby, press  STANDBY/ON while holding down SPEAKERS to disable the
key lock.
Most recent settings have been • The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.
erased.
113
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 114 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
15
Additional information
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output
Symptom
Remedy
The EQ response displayed in
the graphical output following
calibration does not appear
entirely flat.
• There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJUST in the
Auto MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve
optimal sound.
• Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment
needed.
• The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.
EQ adjustments made using
the Manual MCACC setup on
page 47 do not appear to
change the graphical output.
• Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these
adjustments in the graphical output. However, these adjustments are taken this into account by the
filters dedicated to overall system calibration.
Lower frequency response
curves do not seem to have
been calibrated for SMALL
speakers.
• Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers
that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.
• Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable
sound is output for display.
Graphical output data seems to • If the power is switched off, the measurement data for graphical output to a PC is cleared.
have disappeared.
Display
Symptom
Remedy
The display is dark or off.
• Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.
After making an adjustment
the display goes off.
• Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.
You can’t get DIGITAL to
display when using SIGNAL
SEL.
• Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see The
Input Setup menu on page 90).
• If the multichannel analog inputs are selected, select a different input source.
2 DIGITAL or DTS does not
light when playing Dolby/DTS
software.
• These indicators does not light if playback is paused.
• Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source component.
When playing a DVD-Audio
disc, the DVD player display
shows 96 kHz. However, the
receiver’s display does not.
• This is not a malfunction. 96 kHz audio from DVD-Audio discs is only output from the analog
outputs of the DVD player. This receiver cannot show the playback sample rate when using the
analog inputs.
During playback of a DTS 96/24 • Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 38).
source, the display doesn’t
show 96 kHz.
114
En
When playing Dolby Digital or
DTS sources, the receiver’s
format indicators do not light.
• Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 38).
• Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM.
• Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected.
When playing certain discs,
none of the receiver’s format
indicators light.
• The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging for more on what
audio tracks are recorded on the disc.
SCLX81_71.book Page 115 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Additional information
Symptom
Remedy
When playing a disc with the
listening mode set to Auto
Surround, 2 PL II or Neo:6
appear on the receiver.
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 38).
• If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is
not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.
15
During playback of a Surround • The source may be Dolby Surround EX/DTS-ES software, but it has no flag to indicate it is 6.1
EX or DTS-ES source on the
compatible. Set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 39), then switch
SBch AUTO setting, EX or ES to the THX Surround EX or Standard EX listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 35).
does not appear, or the signal
is not properly processed.
During playback of DVD-Audio, • This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a
the display shows PCM.
malfunction.
Remote control
Symptom
Remedy
Cannot be remote controlled.
• Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 7).
• Be sure to operate within 7 m and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel (see
Operating range of remote control unit on page 30).
• Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.
• Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor.
• Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jack (see Operating other Pioneer components with this
unit’s sensor on page 106).
Other components can’t be
operated with the system
remote.
• If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset codes.
• The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.
The SR cable is connected, but
the connected components
can’t be operated with the
remote.
• Reinsert the SR cable, making sure it’s connected to the right jack (see Using this receiver with a
Pioneer flat screen TV on page 68).
• Make sure that there is an analog or HDMI connection between the units. This is necessary for the
SR feature to work.
• Check that the other component is made by Pioneer. The SR feature only works with Pioneer
equipment.
HDMI
Symptom
Remedy
The HDMI indicator blinks
continuously.
• Check all the points below.
No picture or sound.
• This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCPcompatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component, S-Video or composite video
jacks.
• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver
(even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component, S-Video or composite
video jacks between source and receiver.
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor,
please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.
• If video images do not appear on your TV or flat screen TV, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor
or other setting for your component.
• If ‘NOT SUPPORT’ appears in the receiver’s display, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor or
other setting for your component.
• While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for audio
output.
• When this receiver reproduces MULTI CH IN audio sources with the HDMI setting set to
THROUGH, you cannot hear audio output from all channels. In this case, make a digital or analog
audio connection.
• To output signals in DeepColor, use an HDMI cable (High Speed HDMI™ Cable) to connect this
receiver to a component or TV with the DeepColor feature.
115
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 116 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
15
Additional information
Symptom
Remedy
No picture.
• Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 96).
• Set the HDMI output setting to the connected HDMI OUT terminal (in Switching the HDMI output
on page 98).
No sound, or sound suddenly
ceases.
• Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP/THROUGH.
• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.
• If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection for the audio.
• Check the audio output settings of the source component.
Noisy or distorted picture.
• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the
video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may
also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect
the source and display device using the same type of connection (component, S-Video or
composite), then start playback again.
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor,
please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.
HDCP ERROR shows in the
display.
• Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If it is not compatible
with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different type of connection (component, S-Video
or composite). Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be
displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.
Amp-linked operation not
possible using HDMI control
function.
• Select ON for the HDMI control setting (see Setting the HDMI Control mode on page 88).
• Turn the TV’s power on before turning on this receiver’s power.
• Set the TV side HDMI control setting to ON.
• Connect the TV to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal and set the HDMI output to HDMI OUT 1. Then turn
on first the TV’s power, then this receiver’s power.
Important information regarding the HDMI
connection
There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI
signals through this receiver (this depends on the HDMIequipped component you are connecting–check with the
manufacturer for HDMI compatibility information).
If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly through this
receiver (from your component), please try one of the
following configurations when connecting up.
Configuration A
Use component video cables to connect the video output
of your HDMI-equipped component to the receiver’s
component video input. The receiver can then convert the
analog component video signal to a digital HDMI signal
for transmission to the display. For this configuration,
use the most convenient connection (digital is
recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the
operating instructions for more on audio connections.
Note
• The picture quality will change slightly during
conversion.
116
En
Configuration B
Connect your HDMI-equipped component directly to the
display using an HDMI cable. Then use the most
convenient connection (digital is recommended) for
sending audio to the receiver. See the operating
instructions for more on audio connections. Set the
display volume to minimum when using this
configuration.
Note
• If your display only has one HDMI terminal, you can
only receive HDMI video from the connected
component.
• Depending on the component, audio output may be
limited to the number of channels available from the
connected display unit (for example audio output is
reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with stereo audio
limitations).
• If you want to switch the input source, you’ll have to
switch functions on both the receiver and your
display unit.
• Since the sound is muted on the display when using
the HDMI connection, you must adjust the volume on
the display every time you switch input sources.
SCLX81_71.book Page 117 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Additional information
15
HOME MEDIA GALLERY
Symptoms
Causes
Remedies
Cannot access the
network.
The LAN cable is not firmly connected.
Firmly connect the LAN cable.
The router is not switched on.
Switch on the router.
—
Internet security software is currently
installed in the connected component.
There are cases where a component with
Internet security software installed cannot be
accessed.
—
The audio component on the network which Switch on the audio component on the
has been switched off is switched on.
network before switching on this receiver.
Playback does not start
The component is currently disconnected
while ‘Connecting...’
from this receiver or the power supply.
continues to be displayed.
Check whether the component is properly
connected to this receiver or the power
supply.
The PC or Internet radio is The corresponding IP address is not properly Switch on the built-in DHCP server function
not properly operated.
set.
of your router, or set up the network manually
according to your network environment.
The audio files stored on
components on the
network, such as a PC,
cannot be played back.
Refer to
72
—
—
82
The IP address is being automatically
configured.
The automatic configuration process takes
time. Please wait.
—
Windows Media Player 11 is not currently
installed on your PC.
Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.
73
Audio files were recorded in formats other
Play back audio files recorded in MP3, WAV
than MP3, WAV (LPCM only), MPEG-4 AAC, (LPCM only), MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC, or WMA.
FLAC, and WMA.
Note that some audio files recorded in these
formats may not be played back on this
receiver.
—
Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC Refer to the
are being played back on Windows Media
cannot be played back on Windows Media
operation
Player 11 or Windows Media Connect.
Player 11 or Windows Media Connect. Try
manual
using another server.
supplied
with your
server.
Cannot access the
component connected to
the network.
The component connected to the network is Check whether the component is affected by
not properly operated.
special circumstances or is in the sleep
mode.
Try rebooting the component if necessary.
—
The component connected to the network
does not permit file sharing.
Try changing the settings for the component
connected to the network.
—
The folder stored on the component
connected to the network has been deleted
or damaged.
Check the folder stored on the component
connected to the network.
—
The component connected to the network is If the client is automatically authorized, you
not properly set.
need to enter the corresponding information
again. Check whether the connection status
is set to “Do not authorize”.
—
There are no playable audio files on the
component connected to the network.
—
Check the audio files stored on the
component connected to the network.
117
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 118 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
15
Additional information
Symptoms
Causes
Remedies
Audio playback is
undesirably stopped or
disturbed.
The audio file currently being played back
Check whether the audio file was recorded in
was not recorded in a format playable on this a format supported by this receiver.
receiver.
Check whether the folder has been damaged
or corrupted.
Note that there are cases where even the
audio files listed as playable on this receiver
cannot be played back or displayed.
81
The LAN cable is currently disconnected.
72
Connect the LAN cable properly.
There is heavy traffic on the network with the Use 100BASE-TX to access the components
Internet being accessed on the same
on the network.
network.
—
Cannot access Windows
Media Player 11.
You are currently logged onto the domain
Instead of logging onto the domain, log onto
through your PC with Windows XP installed. the local machine.
74
Photo files cannot be
played for ZONE 2.
It is not possible to play photo files in ZONE 2. Set MULTI-ZONE to OFF and play the photo
files in the main zone.
66
Cannot listen to Internet
radio stations.
The firewall settings for components on the
network are currently in operation.
Check the firewall settings for components
on the network.
—
You are currently disconnected from the
Internet.
Check the connection settings for
components on the network, and consult
with your network service provider if
necessary.
82
The broadcasts from an Internet radio station There are cases where you cannot listen to
are stopped or interrupted.
some Internet radio stations even when they
are listed in the list of Internet radio stations
on this receiver.
The folders/files stored on The folders/files are currently stored in a
a USB memory device are region other than the FAT (File Allocation
not displayed.
Table) region.
A USB memory device is
not recognized.
A USB memory device is
connected and displayed,
but the audio files stored
on the USB memory
device cannot be played
back.
118
En
Refer to
Store the folders/files in the FAT region.
78, 119
—
The number of levels in a folder is more than Limit the maximum number of levels in a
8.
folder to 8.
77
There are more than 2000 folders/files stored Limit the maximum number of folders/files
in a single folder.
stored in a single folder to 2000.
77
The audio files are copyrighted.
Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB
memory device cannot be played back.
73
The USB memory device does not support
the mass storage class specifications.
Try using a USB memory device compatible
with the mass storage class specifications.
Note that there are cases where even the
audio files stored on a USB memory device
compatible with the mass storage class
specifications are not played back on this
receiver.
73
Connect the USB memory device and switch
on this receiver.
73
A USB hub is currently being used.
This receiver does not support a USB hub.
73
This receiver recognizes the USB memory
device as a fraud.
Switch off and on again this receiver.
—
Some formats of a USB memory device,
Check whether the format of your USB
including FAT 12, NTFS, and HFS, cannot be memory device is either FAT 16 or FAT 32.
played back on this receiver.
Note that the FAT 12, NTFS, and HFS formats
cannot be played back on this receiver.
73
The file format cannot be properly played
back on this receiver.
81
See the list of file formats that can be played
back on this receiver.
SCLX81_71.book Page 119 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Additional information
Symptoms
Causes
15
Remedies
Refer to
The Home Media Gallery The remote control is not currently set to the Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to set the
cannot be operated with
Home Media Gallery mode.
remote control to the Home Media Gallery
the buttons on the remote
mode.
control.
74
About status messages
Refer to the following information when you come up with a status message while operating the Home Media Gallery.
Status messages
Descriptions
Please Wait
A component on the network, including a PC, is currently being connected. Wait for a while.
Connection Down
The selected category or Internet radio station cannot be accessed.
File Format Error
Cannot be played back for some reasons.
Track Not Found
The selected song has not been found anywhere on the network.
Server Error
The selected server cannot be accessed.
Server Disconnected
The server has been disconnected.
USB Error 1
The amount of electricity consumption for a USB memory device is too large.
empty
There are no files stored in the selected folder.
Preset Not Stored
The selected Internet radio station is not currently registered and saved.
Network Problem
There is a problem with the network settings. Check the network settings. The message also
appears then the network settings of this receiver have been changed. In this case, please
wait.
Out of Range
The value entered is beyond the permitted range of the network settings.
License Error
The license for the contents to be played back is invalid.
Item Already Exists
This is displayed when the file you have attempted to register in the Favorites folder has
already been registered.
Favorite List Full
This is displayed when you have attempted to register a file in the Favorites folder but the
Favorites folder is already full.
Meaning of messages displayed when the HDMI control function is set to ON
Message (error number) Problem
Remedy
HDMI C ERR 110 to 190
HDMI C ERR 1A0
HDMI C ERR 1B0
HDMI C ERR 1C0
HDMI C ERR 2C0
• Check the connection.
• There may be a broken wire in the cable.
• This receiver or connected components may be
damaged.
HDMI cable is not properly connected.
119
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 120 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
15
Additional information
Surround sound formats
Below is a brief description of the main surround sound
formats you’ll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and
terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.
Dolby
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See
www.dolby.com for more detailed information.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding
system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD
and digital broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six
discrete audio channels, comprising five full range
channels and a special LFE (low frequency effects)
channel used mainly for deep, rumbling sound effects;
hence the term “5.1-channel” Dolby Digital.
In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital
decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono,
stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit
rates and channels. Another feature, called Dialog
Normalization, attenuates programs based on the
average level of dialog in a program relative to its peak
level (also known as Dialnorm) in order to achieve
uniform playback level.
Dolby Digital Plus is the next-generation audio
technology for all high-definition programming and
media. It combines the efficiency to meet future
broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to
realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming
high-definition era. Built on Dolby Digital, the multichannel audio standard for DVD and HD broadcasts
worldwide, Dolby Digital Plus was designed for the nextgeneration A/V receivers but remains fully compatible
with all current A/V receivers.
Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi-channel audio programs
of up to 7.1 channels (*) and supports multiple programs
in a single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate
potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate
performance of up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1.7 Mbps
on Blu-ray Disc, and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams
for playback on existing Dolby Digital systems. Dolby
Digital Plus can accurately reproduce the sound
originally intended by directors and producers.
It also features multi-channel sound with discrete
channel output, interactive mixing and streaming
capability in advanced systems. Supported by HighDefinition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital
connection is possible for high-definition audio and
video.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended)
is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a
surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left/
right channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for
compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as
well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX.
Dolby TrueHD is the next-generation lossless encoding
technology developed for high-definition optical discs in
the upcoming era. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing
sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master,
unlocking the true high-definition entertainment
experience on high-definition optical discs in the next
generation. When coupled with high-definition video,
Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented home theater
experience with stunning sound and high-definition
picture.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby
Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using
the innovative “steering logic” circuit, this system
extracts surround sound from sources as follows:
• Dolby Pro Logic – 4.1 channel sound (mono
surround) from any stereo source
• Dolby Pro Logic II – 5.1 channel sound (stereo
surround) from any stereo source
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx – 6.1 or 7.1 channel sound
(stereo surround and surround back) from two
channel or 5.1 (and 6.1) channel sources
With two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is
generated by bass management in the receiver.
En
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Surround EX
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround
120
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds
surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack,
which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for
enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail.
It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8
full-range channels (*) individually with 24-bit/96 kHz
audio. It also features extensive metadata including
dialogue normalization and dynamic range control.
Supported by High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a
single-cable digital connection is possible for highdefinition audio and video.
HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc standards currently limit their
maximum number of audio channels to eight, whereas
Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD support more than
eight audio channels.
SCLX81_71.book Page 121 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Additional information
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
DTS
The DTS technologies are explained below. See
www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.
15
DTS-EXPRESS
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology
supporting up to 5.1 channels with fixed data transfer
rates. This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD
DVD and secondary audio on Blu-ray Disc while boasting
the potential applicability to upcoming broadcasts and
memory audio contents.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding
system from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and
video games. It can deliver up to six discrete audio
channels, comprising five full range channels, including
an LFE channel. Higher sound quality is achieved
through the use of a low compression rate, and high
rates of transmittance during playback.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a
decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES
Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources.
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 gives ‘true’ 6.1 channel sound, with
a completely separate (discrete) surround back channel.
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a surround back channel matrixed
into the surround left/right channels. Both sources are
also compatible with a conventional DTS 5.1 channel
decoder.
DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers
master audio sources recorded in a professional studio
to listeners without any loss of data, preserving audio
quality. DTS-HD Master Audio adopts variable data
transfer rates, facilitating data transfer to the maximum
rate of 24.5 Mbps in the Blu-ray disc format, 18.0 Mbps in
the HD-DVD format, which by far exceeds that of a
standard DVD. These high data transfer rates enable
lossless transmission of 96 kHz/24-bit 7.1-channel audio
sources without deteriorating the quality of the original
sound. DTS-HD Master Audio is an irreplaceable
technology that can reproduce sound faithfully as
intended by the creator of music or movies.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s:
5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616;
6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued &
pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos,
Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are
trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9 Pro) is a
discrete surround format developed by Microsoft
Corporation.
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 can generate 7.1 channel surround sound
from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV)
and from 5.1 channel sources. It uses both the channel
information already encoded into the source, as well as
its own processing to determine channel localization
(with two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is
generated by bass management in the receiver). Two
modes (Cinema and Music) are available using DTS
Neo:6 with two channel sources.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital
Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio
using a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully
backward compatible with all existing decoders. This
means that DVD players can play this software using a
conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.
WMA9 Pro can support up to 5.1/7.1 channel playback
with sampling rates up to 24-bit/96 kHz. Using the unique
WMA compression techniques, WMA9 Pro can deliver
multichannel music and soundtracks over high-speed
internet networks at low bit rates with minimal audio
degradation. Playback may be enjoyed with the Windows
Media Player 9 Series (or above) and other third-party
media players on a personal computer, or with an AV
amplifier with on-board WMA9 Pro decoding.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
121
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 122 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Additional information
15
•
About THX
The THX technologies are explained below. See http://
www.thx.com for more detailed information.
In case of SC-LX81
•
In case of SC-LX71
•
THX Cinema processing
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by
THX Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your
experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your
home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended.
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called
dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres
with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then
transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not
changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX
engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate
the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home,
correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product,
when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added
in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX) (see page 36).
•
Re-Equalization
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and
harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because
film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie
theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization
restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in
a small home environment.
•
Timbre Matching
The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the
direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is
an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all
around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to
the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the
information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely
match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front
speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and
surround speakers.
•
Adaptive Decorrelation
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create
an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre
there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround
speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and
envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest
speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive
Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel’s time and
phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This
expands the listening position and creates—with only two speakers—
the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre.
122
En
THX Ultra2
Before any home theatre component can be THX Ultra2 certified, it
must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous
series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product
feature the THX Ultra2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home
Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for
many years to come. THX Ultra2 requirements cover every aspect of
the product including pre-amplifier and power amplifier performance
and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital
and analog domain.
THX Select2
Before any home theatre component can be THX Select2 certified, it
must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous
series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product
feature the THX Select2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home
Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for
many years to come. THX Select2 requirements cover every aspect of
the product including pre-amplifier and power amplifier performance
and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital
and analog domain.
•
THX Surround EX
THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development
of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film
soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX
technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been
added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called
Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the
currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right,
surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel
provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the
listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound
localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the
Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home
consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the
packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be
found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com.
Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX
logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this
new technology in the home.
This product may also engage the “THX Surround EX” mode during
the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital
Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the
Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may
not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the
tastes of the individual listener.
•
Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed
to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal
surround sound experience. For the best results, go to THX Audio Setup screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to
the speaker spacing, which will re-optimize the surround sound -field.
ASA is used in following modes; THX Ultra2/Select2 CINEMA, THX
Ultra2/Select2 MUSIC and THX Ultra2/Select2 GAMES.
•
Boundary Gain Compensation™
Depending on the listener’s and the subwoofer’s position, the listener
may experience an excessive bass effect. This feature compensates
for excessive bass resulting from a boundary gain effect. This feature
is designed to operate when used with a subwoofer certified to THX
Ultra2™ specifications.
•
THX Music
For the replay of multi-channel music the THX MusicMode should be
selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround
channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital
and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.
SCLX81_71.book Page 123 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Additional information
•
THX Games
For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX
Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing
is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game
sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately
places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360
degree playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it gives
you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field.
•
THX Ultra2/Select2 Cinema
THX Ultra2/Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8
speakers giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In
this mode, ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and
back surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and
directional surround sounds.
DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX
encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Ultra2/Select2
Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded.
Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital
flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that
you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select
the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Ultra2/Select2
Cinema mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.
•
THX Ultra2/Select2 Music
For the playback of multi-channel music the THX Ultra2/Select2
Music mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is
applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources
such as DTS, Dolby Digital and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable
rear soundstage.
•
About Neural – THX Surround
THX Loudness Plus Description
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology featured in
THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX Select2 Plus™ Certified receivers. With
THX Loudness Plus, home theater audiences can now experience the
rich details in a surround mix at any volume level. A consequence of
turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain sound
elements can be lost or perceived differently by the listener. THX
Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and spatial shifts that occur
when the volume is reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient
surround channel levels and frequency response. This enables users
to experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless of the volume
setting. THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied when listening in
any THX listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and THX
Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX Loudness Plus
settings for each type of content.
•
15
Neural-THX® Surround is taking surround sound to the next level. This
revolutionary new technology delivers the rich envelopment and
discrete image detail of surround sound in a format that is fully
compatible with stereo from various content sources. Neural-THX
Surround enables 5.1, 6.1 and 7.1-channel support for gaming, movies
and digital music. By unmasking the audio details, typically lost by
other playback modes, audiences will experience the deep ambience
and subtle details of movies, music and games.
Neural-THX® Digital Music™ is a new surround mode specifically
designed to enhance the playback of compressed digital music content.
It provides listeners with an expanded sound stage and clean surround
experience, even with compressed audio sources such as MP3s and
Internet streams.
Neural-THX Surround has been chosen as the official surround sound
format for TV sports broadcasting, 7.1 games, Music Direct Internet
streaming as well as leading FM/HD radio stations worldwide. And with
this technology being used by sound designers during content
creation, as well as embedded into playback devices, Neural-THX
Surround promises a listening experience that is true to the original
mix.
For additional information, please visit www.neuralsurround.com.
This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio
Corporation and THX Ltd. PIONEER Corporation hereby grants the user
a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited right of use to this product
under USA and foreign patent, patent pending and other technology or
trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. “Neural
Surround”, “Neural Audio”, “Neural” and “NRL” are trademarks and
logos owned by Neural Audio Corporation, THX is a trademark of THX
Ltd., which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
THX Ultra2/Select2 Games
For the playback of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX
Ultra2/Select2 Games mode should be selected. In this mode THX
ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0
encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital.
This accurately places all game audio surround information,
providing a full 360 degree playback environment. THX Ultra2/Select2
Games mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in
all points of the surround field.
THX, the THX logo, Ultra2 Plus and Select2 Plus are trademarks of THX
Ltd. which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
123
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 124 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
15
Additional information
About FLAC
FLAC Decoder
Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
2007 Josh Coalson
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with
or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
• Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
• Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
124
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 125 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Additional information
15
Listening modes with different input signal formats
The following charts outline the listening modes available with different input signal formats, depending on the surround back
channel processing and decoding method you have selected.
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
SBch Processing
Input signal format
Standard
THX
Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
ON/AUTO
(Automatically
selects 6.1/7.1
channel
decoding)
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
Stereo playback
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
As above
Stereo playback
As above
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD
DTS-EXPRESS
Stereo playback
THX CINEMA
THX MUSIC
THX GAMES
As above
Dolby Digital Surround
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME+THX
GAMES
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 PRO LOGICa
2 PRO LOGICa
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
2 PRO LOGIC+THXa
THX Ultra2/Select2 GAMESb,d
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME+THX
GAMES
THX Ultra2/Select2 GAMESb,d
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
2 PRO LOGIC+THX CINEMAa
DTS Surround
As above
As above
Neo:6 CINEMA
SACD
As above
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
Stereo playback
Other stereo sources
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME+THX
GAMES
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
Stereo playback
2 PRO LOGICa
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
Neural THXc
THX Ultra2/Select2 GAMESb,d
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
2 PRO LOGIC+THX CINEMAa
125
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 126 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
15
Additional information
SBch Processing
Input signal format
Standard
THX
Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
CINEMA
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME+THX
GAMES
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
Stereo playback
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
As above
Stereo playback
As above
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD
DTS-EXPRESS
Stereo playback
THX CINEMA
THX MUSIC
THX GAMES
As above
Dolby Digital Surround
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
CINEMA
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME+THX
GAMES
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
DTS Surround
As above
As above
Neo:6 CINEMA
SACD
As above
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
2 PRO LOGIC ll MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
Stereo playback
Other stereo sources
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME+THX
GAMES
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
Stereo playback
OFFe
2 PRO LOGICa
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
Neural THXc
a.No sound is output from the surround back speakers when 2 Pro Logic is selected.
b.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
c.This is only selectable when the input signal is an analog or PCM signal.
d.Ultra2 for the SC-LX81, Select2 for the SC-LX71.
e.Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.
126
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 127 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Additional information
15
Multichannel signal formats
SBch Processing
Input signal format
Standard
THX
Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
ON
(7.1 channel
decoding used
for all sources)
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
WMA9 Pro
PCM
(6.1/7.1 channel)
Straight decoding
THX CINEMA
THX MUSIC
THX GAMES
Straight decoding
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
Dolby Digital EX
THX SURROUND EX
a
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
a
THX Ultra2/Select2 CINEMAa,c
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIEa
THX Ultra2/Select2 MUSICa,c
THX Ultra2/Select2 GAMESa,c
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
2 EX+THX GAMESb
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
As above
Straight decoding
As above
DTS-EXPRESS
DTS-HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
(5.1 channel)
Straight decoding
THX CINEMAb
Straight decoding
THX Ultra2/Select2
CINEMAa,c
THX Ultra2/Select2 MUSICa,c
THX Ultra2/Select2 GAMESa,c
THX MUSICb
THX GAMESb
Dolby Digital EX
(6.1 channel flagged)
Dolby Digital EX
MOVIEa
2 Pro Logic IIx
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
THX SURROUND EX
2 Pro Logic IIx
MOVIE+THXa
THX Ultra2/Select2 CINEMAa,c
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic IIx
MOVIEa
THX Ultra2/Select2 MUSICa,c
THX Ultra2/Select2 GAMESa,c
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
2 EX+THX GAMESb
127
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 128 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
15
Additional information
SBch Processing
Input signal format
Standard
SBch
Processing
ON
(7.1 channel
decoding used
for all sources)
DTS-ES
(6.1 channel sources/
6.1 channel flagged)
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIEa
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
MUSIC
THX
Auto Surround
DTS-ES Matrix+THX CINEMA DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS-ES Discrete+THX CINEMA
DTS+2 Pro Logic IIx
MOVIE+THXa
THX Ultra2/Select2 CINEMAa,c
THX Ultra2/Select2 MUSICa,c
THX Ultra2/Select2 GAMESa,c
DTS-ES Matrix+THX MUSICb
DTS-ES Matrix+THX GAMESb
DTS-ES Discrete+THX MUSICb
DTS-ES Discrete+THX GAMESb
DTS and DTS 96/24
(5.1 channel encoding)
DTS+Neo:6
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIEa
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
MUSIC
DTS+Neo:6+THX CINEMA
DTS+2 Pro Logic IIx
MOVIE+THXa
DTS+Neo:6
THX Ultra2/Select2 CINEMAa,c
THX Ultra2/Select2 MUSICa,c
THX Ultra2/Select2 GAMESa,c
DTS+Neo:6+THX MUSICb
DTS+Neo:6+THX GAMESb
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THXa
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital EX
WMA9 Pro
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIEa
PCM
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
(5.1 channel encoding)
THX SURROUND EX
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THXa
THX Ultra2/Select2 CINEMAa,c
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIEa
THX Ultra2/Select2 MUSICa,c
THX Ultra2/Select2 GAMESa,c
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THXa
2 EX+THX GAMESb
SACD
Dolby Digital EX
(5.1 channel encoding) 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIEa
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
128
En
THX Ultra2/Select2 MUSICc
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIEa
SCLX81_71.book Page 129 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Additional information
15
SBch Processing
Input signal format
Standard
THX
Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
AUTO
(Automatically
selects 6.1/7.1
channel
decoding)
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
WMA9 Pro
PCM
(6.1/7.1 channel)
Straight decoding
THX CINEMA
Straight decoding
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
Straight decoding
Straight decoding
Straight decoding
Dolby Digital EX
THX SURROUND EX
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIEa
Dolby Digital EX
(6.1 channel flagged)
SBch
Processing
OFFd
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIEa
DTS-ES
(6.1 channel sources/
6.1 channel flagged)
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS-ES+THX (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
Other 5.1 channel
sources
(5.1 channel encoding)
Straight decoding
THX Ultra2/Select2 CINEMAa,c
Straight decoding
SACD
(5.1 channel encoding)
Straight decoding
SACD
(5.1 channel)
Straight decoding
THX MUSIC
Straight decoding
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1
channel sources
As above
THX CINEMA
THX MUSIC
THX GAMES
As above
THX
CINEMAb
THX Ultra2/Select2 MUSICa,c
THX
Straight decoding
MUSICb
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
b.This can be selected when only one surround speaker is connected.
c.Ultra2 for the SC-LX81, Select2 for the SC-LX71.
d.Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.
129
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 130 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
15
Additional information
Stream direct with different input signal formats
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct mode (see
Using Stream Direct on page 38) you have selected.
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
Surround Back speaker(s)
Input signal format
DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
Connected
Dolby Digital Surround
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
DTS Surround
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 CINEMA
Other stereo sources
Stereo playback
Stereo playback
Analog sources
As above
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
Not connected
PCM sources
As above
PCM DIRECT (stereo)
DVD-A sources
As above
PCM DIRECT (stereo)
SACD sources
As above
Stereo playback
Dolby Digital Surround
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
DTS Surround
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 CINEMA
Other stereo sources
Stereo playback
Stereo playback
Analog sources
As above
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
PCM sources
As above
PCM DIRECT (stereo)
DVD-A sources
As above
PCM DIRECT (stereo)
SACD sources
As above
Stereo playback
Multichannel signal formats
Surround Back speaker(s)
Input signal format
DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
Connected
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIEa 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIEa
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel
flagged)
Not connected
DVD-A sources/Muti-ch PCM
Straight decoding
Straight decoding
SACD sources
(5.1 channel encoding)
As above
As above
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources
As above
As above
DVD-A sources/Muti-ch PCM
Straight decoding
Straight decoding
SACD sources
(5.1 channel encoding)
As above
As above
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources
As above
As above
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
130
En
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete) DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
SCLX81_71.book Page 131 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Additional information
15
Specifications
Amplifier Section
HDMI Section
Multi channel simultaneous power output (1 kHz, 1 %, 8 Ω)
7ch total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700 W (LX81), 630 W(LX71)
Continuous Power Output (Multichannel)
(DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 6 Ω)
Front . . . . . . . 190 W + 190 W (LX81), 180 W + 180 W (LX71)
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 W (LX81), 180 W (LX71)
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 W + 190 W (LX81)
180 W + 180 W (LX71)
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 W + 190 W (LX81)
180 W + 180 W (LX71)
(DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 8 Ω)
Front . . . . . . . 160 W + 160 W (LX81), 150 W + 150 W (LX71)
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 W (LX81), 150 W (LX71)
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 W + 160 W (LX81)
150 W + 150 W (LX71)
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 W + 160 W (LX81)
150 W + 150 W (LX71)
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-pin
Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-pin (5 V, 100 mA)
Total harmonic distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.05 %
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 130 W, 8 Ω)
Rated Power Output – Stereo (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09 %, 8 Ω)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W+140 W
Miscellaneous
• The above specifications are applicable when the
power supply is 230 V.
Network Section
LAN terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX
USB Section
USB terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB2.0 Full Speed
FM Tuner Section
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz
Antenna Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω unbalanced
AM Tuner Section
Frequency Range . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1602 kHz (9 kHz step)
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna
Power Requirements. . . . . . . AC 220 V to 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 W
In standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 W (HDMI Control OFF)
0.7 W (HDMI Control ON)
Dimensions . . . . 420 (W) mm x 200 (H) mm x 459.5 (D) mm
Weight (without package). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.5 kg
Audio Section
Furnished Parts
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)
PHONO MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 mV/47 kΩ
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 mV/47 kΩ
Frequency Response (LINE). . . . . . .5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB
Output (Level/Impedance)
REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 mV/2.2 kΩ
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
[DIN (continuous rated power output/50 mW)]
LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 dB/65 dB
Setup microphone (for Auto MCACC Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AA/IEC R6P dry cell batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Remote control unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
These operating instructions
Composite Video / S-Video Section
Note
• Specifications and the design are subject to possible
modifications without notice, due to improvements.
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 dB
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Hz to 10 MHz
Component Video Section
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 dB
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Hz to 100 MHz
131
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 132 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Additional information
15
Cleaning the unit
• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and
dirt.
• When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth
dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six
times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe
again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or
cleansers.
• Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide sprays or
other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will
corrode the surface.
Our philosophy
Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater
listening experience as close as possible to the vision of
the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they
created the original soundtrack. We do this by focusing
on three important steps:
1
Achieving the highest possible sound quality
2 Allowing for customized acoustic calibration
according to any listening area
3 Fine-tuning the receiver with the help of worldclass studio engineers1
1
With the cooperation of AIR Studios, this receiver has been designated
AIR Studios Monitor:
Features
• Direct Energy HD Amplifier
Through a collaboration, Pioneer and ICEpower have
jointly development a unique class D amplifier called a
“Direct Energy High Fidelity Class D (HD) amplifier”. This
new generation reference amplifier offers outstanding
performance (high output of 700 W (SC-LX81)/630 W (SCLX71) simultaneous) with high sound quality and
reproduces the latest in multi-channel digital contents.
• Easy setup using Advanced MCACC
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate
surround sound setup, which includes the advanced
features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ. This
innovative technology measures the reverb
characteristics of your listening area, allowing you to
customize your system calibration with the help of a
graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or
using a computer. With the additional benefits of
132
En
numerous MCACC preset memories, standing wave
control and microphone measurements from a series of
reference points, your home theater experience can be
truly customized for optimal surround sound.
• Phase Control
The Phase Control feature corrects the phase distortion
as well as group delay for LFE (Low-Frequency Effects)
audio signals during multichannel playback.
• Full Band Phase Control
The Full Band Phase Control feature analyzes the
frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers
connected and corrects the phase distortion to the
flattened frequency-phase characteristics. This
correction minimizes the group delay of the middle- and
low-frequency ranges against the high-frequency range
and improves the frequency-phase characteristics
across all ranges. Furthermore, the enhanced frequencyphase characteristics between channels ensure better
surround sound integration.
• HOME MEDIA GALLERY
This receiver can play back contents stored on your
computer when your computer is connected to the LAN
terminal of this receiver. It is also possible to play
contents stored on iPod and USB devices. Also, you can
listen to the Internet radio stations.
• Dolby Digital and DTS decoding, including Dolby
Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES, Dolby
Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-EXPRESS and DTS-HD
Master Audio
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding brings theater sound
right into your home with up to six channels of surround
sound, including a special LFE (Low Frequency Effects)
channel for deep, realistic sound effects.
The built-in Dolby Pro Logic IIx and DTS Neo:6 decoders
not only provide full surround sound decoding for Dolby
Surround sources, but will also generate convincing
surround sound for any stereo source.
Also, with the addition of a surround back speaker, you
can take advantage of the built-in Dolby Digital EX and
DTS-ES decoders for six-channel surround sound.
Furthermore, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD,
which are designed for the next-generation highdefinition media such as Blu-ray Disc and HD DVD,
support up to 7.1 channels and 8 channels respectively.
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology
supporting up to 5.1 channels, with fixed data transfer
rates ranging from 24 kbps to 256 kbps (this encoding is
available only when signals are delivered to this receiver
as primary audio).
DTS-HD Master Audio delivers audio signals to listeners
without any loss of data with its high transfer rates.
SCLX81_71.book Page 133 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
Additional information
15
• THX certified design
In case of SC-LX81
This receiver is THX Ultra2™ certified, allowing you to
take advantage of new THX technologies such as ASA
(Advanced Speaker Array), which can process any 5.1
channel source for 6.1 channel (THX Surround EX) or 7.1
channel (THX Ultra2 CINEMA, THX Ultra2 MUSIC and
THX Ultra2 GAMES) playback.
• THX certified design
In case of SC-LX71
This receiver is THX Select2™ certified, allowing you to
take advantage of new THX technologies such as ASA
(Advanced Speaker Array), which can process any 5.1
channel source for 6.1 channel (THX Surround EX) or 7.1
channel (THX Select2 CINEMA, THX Select2 MUSIC and
THX Select2 GAMES) playback.
• HDMI and digital video conversion
This receiver is compatible with the HDMI digital video
format, providing you with high-definition digital video/
audio via a single cable. High-quality sound formats such
as DTS-HD and Dolby TrueHD are supported while this
receiver is also compatible with the DeepColor and
x.v.Color feature (x.v.Color is trademarks of Sony
Corporation). You can operate this receiver in
synchronization with your Pioneer component that
supports the HDMI Control function by connecting your
component to this receiver via HDMI. Also, the built-in
digital video converter of this receiver makes both deinterlacing and up-scaling possible, and analog video
signals being input are converted and output as digital
video signals at the HDMI terminal.
• DCDi
Faroudja’s DCDi Processing is selectable and ensures
that images are smooth and natural, without staircasing
or jaggies.
This product includes FontAvenue® fonts licenced by NEC
Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC
Corporation.
133
En
SCLX81_71.book Page 136 Monday, June 2, 2008 6:16 PM
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D. F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-427 0
K002_B_En
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2008 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
<ARB7393-A>
Printed in
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement